Skip to main content

Full text of "The cult of the needle"

See other formats


.    DIRECT^' 

BULGARIAN;  CAT> 

HUf     ARiAN  AND  ti 

EMBROIDERY  AT 
WORK,  HEMSTITCHING, 
NETHNG.  V'OOL-W 

-i  ->\'A,  CA.AR1C 
:ROS3 ,  IN  i  1SH  MA  r 
ND  RETICELU^ 
ND  OTHER   FORMS  OF 
i4EEDLECRAFT  X      **       * 
m$M^Js!EB&' 


k-  Edited  By 

Flora  Klicfcn 


r 


"A    Live    Magazine    for    Women/' 

"  No  praise  can  be  too  high  for  this  Magazine. 
Each  article  is  written  with  knowledge  and 
insight,  and  in  a  practical  spirit." 

— Morning  Post. 


D. 

NET 
Monthly 


On  Sale 
EVERY- 
WHERE. 


EDITED    BY    FLORA    KLICKMANN. 

"It  is  a  treasure-house  of  story  and  article,  as  well 
as  being  an  infallible  guide  to  arts  and  crafts  of 
various  kinds." — Lady's  PietoriaL 

"  It  is  a  happy  mixture  of  Fiction,  Cooking, 
Dressmaking,  and  Household  Management,  as 
well  as  articles  on  matters  of  topical  interest." 

— Standard. 

"  It  concerns  itself  with  any  and  every  interest 
which  a  girl  may  have,  or  ought  to  have." 

— Westminster  Gazette. 
"  It  has  won  for  itself  a  place  among  the  best 
publications  of  its  kind." — Daily  News. 

Published  at  4,  Bouverie  Street,  London,  E.G. 


Two  "Jolly   Little  Books"   for  Little  Girls, 


SECOND     EDITION. 

Price  I/-   net  (by  Post,  1/5). 
1        Uniform  with  the  "  Little  Girl's  Sewing  Book." 

(See  below.) 

\  THE  LITTLE  GIRL'S 

i  KNITTING  ** 
|  CROCHET  BOOK 

Edited  by  FLORA  KLICKMANN 

Editor  of  "The  Girl's  Own  Paper  and  Woman's  Magazine,"  "Stitchery,"  etc. 

Containing  instructions  for  making  many  pretty  articles  for 
Dollie,  for  Baby,  for  Mother  and  for  Auntie—  just  easy,  attractive 
and  yet  useful  things  that  a  small  girl  will  love  to  make. 


"  The  patterns  are  very  practical."—  Christian  World. 
"  An  admirable  little  book."—  Western  Daily  Press. 

Published    at    4,    Bouverie    Street,    London,    E.G.,    and    sold    by    all 
Booksellers  and  at  the  Fancy-Work  Shops. 


'  A  jolly  little  book.'  —  The  Gentlewoman. 

'  A  delightful  little  book."—  The  Daily  Graphic. 


Price  1  /-  net  (by  post  1/5). 


THIRD  EDITION. 


THE 


^^"zn 

iu!e(i/l*^eHJng[}ook 


LITTLE  GIRL'S 
SEWING  BOOK 

Edited  by  FLORA  KLICKMANN, 

Editor  of  "The  Girl's  Own  Paper  and  Woman's  Magazine." 

Profusely  Illustrated  and  attractively  bound  in 
coloured  picture  boards.     Large  Imperial  16mo. 

Containing  Pretty  Things  that  a  Little 
Girl  can  make,  including  an  Outfit  for 
Dolly's  Wardrobe,  Furnishings  for  Dolly's 
Cottage,  Presents  for  Mother  and 
Auntie,  and  Handy  Things  for  Herself. 

"  This  very  copiously  and  usefully  illustrated  work  contains  lessons  in  practically  all  the  stitches  used 
in  plain   needlework     as   well   as   the  more   useful  of  the   fancy   stitches.    Each   article  deals  with  some 


-ThestraUonesttrve  that  nimble  fingers  will  itch  to  set  to  work  immediately       Unlike 
many  books  on  needlework,  this  one  is  written  in  simple  and  readable  English,  so  that  not  merely  a  little 

rett^^ 

On  Sale  at  the  Book  and  Fancywork  Shops,  the   Fancywork 
Departments  of  the  Stores  and  Drapers,  and  at  the  Bookstalls. 

St-  LONDON.  E.C. 


The  Cult  of 
the    Needle 


The   Home  Art  Series 


The  Cult  of 
the  Needle 


EDITED     BY 

FLORA     KLICKMANN 

il 

Editor  of  "  The  Girl's  Own  Paper  &  Woman's  Magazine." 

SECOND  \IMPRESSION 


London  : 

The  Office  of  "  The  Girl's  Own  Paper  &  Woman's  Magazine 
4  Bouverie  Street  E.G.,  &  65  St.  Paul's  Churchyard. 


'"""WOOLCRAPT 


9999999 


WOMAN'S  WORK  IN  WAR  TIME. 

No  work  is  more  practical  than  knitting. 
Every  woman  making  a  useful  garment 
contributes  to  the  wealth  of  the  country., 

73  useful  recipes,  simple  and  advanced,  for 
2d.,  in  "Woolcratt*'  published  by 

J.  &  J.  Baldwin,  Halifax, 

»  England. 

Spinners  of  the  famous  "Beehive"  Knitting 
Wools,  who  will  send  "Woolcratt"  for  2^d. 
post  free,  or  order  it  of  your  newsagent  for  2d* 


AnoYher  of  J  &  J.  Baldwin's  useful  publi- 
cations is  "RUGS  &  MATS"  No.  6  (post 
fr££  2|ir.)  ilhisteatin^  and  explaining  clearly 
the  simple  way  of  making  handsome  woollen 
rugs  from  Beehive  and  Turkey  Rug  Wools. 
A  most  interesting  pastime  for  convalescent 
soldiers.  No  knowledge  of  knitting  required, 


RUG  WOOL 


•RRURK 


i*.  V^  ^    *  V*  •*«*.„•*  ****.,*   **>*¥»-**,*   ft    j-'fc.    i  *"^fc 


EDITED  BY  FLORA  KLICKMANN. 


The  little  squares  here  shown  would 
make  attractive  d'oilies,  or  could  be 
used  as  inlets  in  a  larger  piece  of  work. 
Many  of  the  stitches  used  are  similar 
to  those  in  Hardanger  work,  and 
workers  will  easily  follow  them  with 
the  aid  of  the  enlarged  details  given. 

For  this  work  use  Congress  canvas, 
with  Peri-Lusta  for  the  embroidery. 

The  little  Star  d'oily  requires  a 
7-inch  square  of  canvas.  The  work 
is  commenced  at  the  centre.  When 
the  centre  is  settled  point  out  a  little 
square  of  four  threads  and  begin  the 
work  as  the  detail  shows.  The  little 
triangles  have  21  stitches,  the  larger 
covers  12.  the  shortest  4  threads;  the 
4  triangles  make  a  square  of  28  threads. 
The  openwork  squares  around  the 
triangles  have  21  stitches  on  each 
side,  the  stitches  cover  4  threads. 
When  the  squares  are  worked  round, 
cut  off  the  threads  at  the  inside  of 
the  square  as  follows : — Cut  away  4 
threads  on  each  side  of 
corners,  then  leave  4 
threads  for  weaving, 
and  again  cut  away  4 
threads  on  each  side 
until  you  have  9  little 
squares  in  each  square. 
The  4  threads  you  sew 
over  and  over  as 
shown,  and  when 


How  to 

work 

Hungarian 
Embroidery 


starting  on  the  middle  of  each  bar 
the  thread  should  be  looped  and 
twisted  to  the  other.  For  the  outer 
solid  portion  every  diamond  is  made 
of  23  stitches,  the  shortest  covers  4, 
the  longest  16  threads. 

The  Diagonal  d'oily  measures  the 
same  as  the  previous  one.  Here  the 
work  is  also  started  at  the  centre. 
The  squares  are  made  by  21  stitches 
over  4  threads,  7  squares  are  to  be 
worked  diagonally  across  the  linen. 
On  each  side  of  the  squares  the  solid 
triangles  already  described  should  be 
made  12  on  each  side. 

When  finished,  work  along  the  tri- 
angles the  little  squares  of  4  threads,  36 
on  each  side.  Then  start  at  the  12th 
little  square  and  form  a  large  square  on 
each  side  as  shown,  each  square  con- 
tained by  12  little  squares.  In  the 
centre  of  the  big  square  make  a  little 
square  of  4  threads,  having  on  each 
side  5  stitches  over  4  threads.  The  star 
is  made  of  17  stitches 
on  each  diamond,  the 
shortest  4,  the  longest 
8  threads.  The  little 
diagram  is  made  by  12 
stitches,  the  shortest 
over  4,  the  longest 
over  12  threads. 

The  separate  detail 
of    this    section 


355S84 


C.N.       A 


Hungarian 
Embroidery. 


jf£.£ 
A*»i  :'!";•.;• 


The  open-work  triangle  used  in 
the  Diagonal  D'oily. 

shows  a  rather  more  elaborate  diagram, 
composed  of  20  stitches  and  having  a 
cross-stitch  in  the  middle.     The  tri- 
angle    in     openwork 
has  on   the  outside 
53     stitches   over 
4   threads. 
After     out-  ... 

lining  it,  .-.".*• 

cut 


m 


t 

m-mm 


t  h  e 

"',  *  f"4 
threads  «  .- 

as  for 
H  a1  r  d  a  n  ger 
wo  rk,  and 
work  over  and 
over  the  4 
threads  each 
way  that  are 
left.  For  the 
openwork 
squares  leave  4 
threads  in  the 
middle  of  each 
side,  cutting 
away  the 
remaining 
threads,  cai'ry 
the  working 


. 


f «.» 


Details  of  the  Star  D'oily    and 
the  Insertion. 

thread  from  corner  to 
nig  corner,    and  work 

over  and  over  the  bai^ 
formed. 

The  insertion 
requires  a  3^-inch 
wide  strip  of  linen. 
The  stars  are  worked 
as  for  the  d'oily. 
The  triangle  has  37 
stitches  on  the 
straight  side.  Leave 
4  threads  below  this 
straight  side.  Then 
draw  out  1  thread.  Again 
*  •••••  leave  4  threads,  and 

draw  6  threads,  leave  4  and 
draw  1.     Each   vertical  stitch 
is  taken  over  4  threads,  and  the 
long  bars  are  worked  over  8 
threads.      This   insertion 
would  make  a  very  handsome 


Details  of  the    ,  , 
Diagonal  D'oily.  blouse  trimming. 


Two  Handsome 
Designs. 


X  INSEKTION  DESIGN. 


»•«•• 


A  HANDSOME   DIAGONAL,  D'OILT. 


The  Making  of  Fringes. 


AN  EASILY-MADE   FKINGE. 

Knotted  fringe,  one  of  the  many 
revived  handicrafts,  is  coining  very 
much  to  the 
fore.  And  no 
wonder — for 
it  is  one  of 
the  most 
graceful 
additions  to 
pieces  of 
stitchery. 
The  rejuven- 
ation of  the 
craft  is 
heartily 
welc  om  ed 
by  all  who 
treasure 
some  lovely 
old  fringe 
from  "great- 
grand- 
mamma's 
b  o  t  t  o  m  - 
drawer." 
And  every- 
body w  h  o  A.  TWINEP  FRINGE 


likes  to  turn  out  high-class 
workmanlike  stitchery,  will 
find  in  fringe-making  not 
only  a  means  of  aiding 
materially  to  the  beauty  and 
value  of  her  work,  but  also 
an  art  which  offers  large  scope 
both  for  artistic  taste  and  for 
manipulative  skill. 

The  Origin  of 
Fringes. 

The  original  idea  of  fringe- 
making  was  to  utilise  the  rem- 
nant of  the  warp.    When  a  piece 
of  material  was  finished  in  the 
loom,    the     last    three-quarter 
yard  of  warp  could  not  be  filled 
in,    as  the    machinery    of    the 
loom  through  which  the  warp 
was  cunningly  threaded  hindered  the 
shuttle  from  further  work.    However, 
..-    -          -  it  was  found 

t  h  a  t  t  h  e 
fringe  look- 
ed pretty, 
and  the  idea 
to  knot  it 
came  by 
degrees. 

It  may  be 
mentioned 
here  that 
this  was  the 
beginning 
of  another 
art,  the  one 
which  deve- 
loped into 
"pillow- 
lace."  But 
this  is  by 
the  way. 

To  return 
to  the  prac- 
tical point 
of  the  ques- 


tion,  knotted  fringes  are  now  made 
of  various  materials  applied  on  the 
embroidery  as  well  as  by  unravelling 
the  weft  and  knotting  the  warp. 
In  making  it  with  the  warp,  the  length 
and  pattern  should  be  decided  upon 
before  cutting  out  your  material,  and  a 
piece  of  the  material  should  be  left  free 
for  the  fringe.  When  the  embroidery 
is  finished,  the  woof  should  be  unrav- 
elled, care  being  taken  that  the  warp 
does notgettoo entangled.  Remember 
that  the  knotting  takes  up  a  consider- 
able length.  It  is  advisable  to  allow 
anextratwo- 
thirds,  i.e., 
if  your  fringe 
is  to  be  6 
inches  long 
the  warp 
should  be  10 
i  n  c  h  e  s ,  as 
the  4  inches 
will  be  taken 
up  by  the 
knots. 

Knotting  and 
Twining. 

B  e  f  o  r  e 
beginning 
to  knot 
the  fringe, 
secure  t  h  t 
piece  of 
tapestry  by 
means  of 
some  heavy 
weigh  t  s 
laid  on  it. 
E  qual i  s  e 
your  tassels 
as  much  as 
possible, 
and  when 
practicable 
count  the  A  VANDYKE  FBINGE. 


Knotting  the 
Warp. 

threads  of  every  tassel.  (This  can,  of 
course,  not  be  rigorously  carried  out 
when  working  on  fine  material). 
Make  a  knot  on  every  "tassel,"  manipu- 
lating the  knot  with  a  bodkin  or 
some  such  blunt  implement.  When 
the  1st  row  is  knotted,  every  tassel 
should  be  equally  divided,  each  half 
being  joined'-on  to  the  neighbouring 
half-tassel.  The  knot  joining  the  2 
halves  together  is  done  as  described 
above. 

One   variation    is   to  twine  1  row : 
Divide  tassel,   twine  tightly  and  the 


mm 


MAKING  THE  VANDYKE  FRINGE. 


The  Making 
of  Fringes. 

way  of  the 
thread  (if 
twine  d 
originally) 
each  half 
separately, 
then  bring 
the  2  halves 
round  and 
round  each 
other  in  the 
oppos  i  t  e 
direction  to 
that  in 
which  they 
were  first 
twined, 
h  o  1  d  i  n  g 
each  '  twine ' 
in  place  the 
whole  time 
by  just 
changing 
hands  con- 
tinual 1  y  ; 
then  secure 
the  twine 
with  a  knot. 
When  the 
pattern  of 
the  fringe  is 
completed 
the  edges 
should  be 
eve  n  1  y 
trimmed. 
Applied  Fringe. 

A  knotted  fringe  can  be  applied  on 
a  piece  of  stitchery .  Instead  of  unrav- 
elling the  woof,  a  fringe  can  be  added 
to  it,  and  can  be  made  of  wool,  silk, 
macrame-cottou ,  or  whatever  material 
may  suit  the  work.  But  it  must  be 
remembered  that  since  the  fringe 
is  meant  to  represent  the  warp,  it 
should  correspond  both  in  thickness 


FRINGE   NO.   3   IN   THE   MAKING 


a  n  d  i  11 
colour.  If  a 
wool  twice 
as  thick  as- 
the  material 
is  used  for 
the  warp  r 
then  one 
should  allow 
8  threads 
intervening 
space  for 
every  4 
threads  of 
the  fringe, 
and  so  on. 
For  applied 
fringe  cut 
all  your 
strands  the 
same  length 
to  begin 
with  —  twice 
as  long  as 
you  want 
the  fringe 
previous  to 
knotting  it. 
Mark  out 
the  spaces 
for  thread- 
ing in  the 
fringe,  or  if 
a  coarse 
material, 

such  as  canvas,  count  the  threads. 
Now  thread  both  ends  of  the  fringe- 
strands  into  the  needle  and  thread 
that  through  the  material  from 
the  wrong  side.  Catch  the  loop  with 
your  left  1st  finger  and  thread  your 
needle  through  that.  For  the  sub- 
sequent rows  see  directions  above. 

The  Colour  of 
the  Fringe. 

This  should  always  be  that  of  the 


Applied 
Fringes, 


actual  orapparent  warp  of  the  material. 
By  the  "apparent"  warp  is  meant 
any  stitchery  obviously  meant  to 
represent  part  of  the  warp,  such  as  in 
various  kinds  of  tapestry  where  long 
stitches  are  employed  the  way  of  the 
warp.  Here  the  same  colours  can 
effectively  be  continued  in  the  fringe. 
But  where  stitchery  is  obviously  of 
the  applied  kind,  it  is  in  better  taste 
to  make  the  fringe  entirely  of  the 
same  colour  as  the  material,  . 

Its  Decorative 
Use. 

Wherever  the  embroidery  suggests 
the  craft  of  the  loom,  the  fringe  is 
absolutely  the  most  stylish  finish,  for 
the  very  character  of  the  stitchery  not 
only  seems  incomplete  without  it,  but 
it  positively  calls  for  it  as  a  softening, 
graceful  accompaniment.  Conse- 
quently, wherever  any  kind  of  tapes- 
try, any  of  the  Indian  embroideries, 
or  such  richly-coloured,  tapestry-look- 
ing needlecrafts  are  of  decorative 
effect,  that  effect  is  added  by  a  nicely- 
patterned  and  carefully-worked 
fringe. 

No.  1.    A  Twined 
Fringe. 

Of  the  three  fringes  illustrated  No. 
1  is  made  as  follows: — 

Measure  out  equal  spaces  and  cut 
strands  for  fringe  as  directed.  This 
particular  fringe  takes  np  a  good  deal 
of  wool  on  account  of  so  many  twined 
rows,  the  original  length  of  strands 
being  28  inches  for  a  7-iiich  fringe. 

Double  thread  through  material 
and  knot  as  directed. 

1st  Row. — This  is  twined;  the  2nd 
movement  of  the  twining  is  repeated 
5  times  and  then  the  knot  is  tied. 

2nd  Row. — Divide  the  tassels  and 
join  the  2  neighbouring  halves  with 
a  knot. 


3rd    Row.  —  A.s     1st     row. 
4th  Row. — As  2nd  row. 
5th  Row. — As  1st  and  3rd  rows. 
6th  Row. — As  2nd  and  4th  rows 

No.  2.     A  Vandyke 
Fringe. 

For  this  Vandyke  fringe  measure 
the  article  --to  be  finished  off  with 
fringe  and  subdivide  into  spaces  of  3 
to  4  inches.  In  each  space  measure 
off  and  mark  1  ascending  row  and  1 
descending  one,  4  deep  as  illustration. 
If  the  material  is  unyielding,  the  holes 
should  be  pierced  before  threading  the 
fringe  through.  Then  thread  as 
directed. 

1st  Row. — Knot  the  fringe,  includ- 
ing one-half  of  the  lowest  tassel,  as 
only  half  of  this  belongs  to  each  motif. 
The  outer  half  of  the  initial  tassel  is 
thus  left  free.  An  illustration  shows 
this  in  the  making.  In  each  of  the 
following  rows  the  outer  half  of  each 
end-tassel  is  likewise  left  free  until  in 
the  5th  row  only  one  complete  tassel 
with  half  a  tassel  on  each  side  is  left. 
These  are  joined  into  1  by  a  knot. 

It  is  the  better  plan  to  do  all  the 
"Vandykes"  first.  The  half  tassel  left 
free  in  the  last  "Vandyke"  will,  of 
course,  be  part  of  the  next  motif. 
When  all  the  Vandykes  are  completed 
thread  a  darning-  or  crewel-needle 
with  the  same  kind  of  wool  (or  silk) 
as  you  are  using  for  the  fringe. 
Gather  up  the  4  half-tassels  on  each 
side  into  1  tassel  and  wind  the  wool  in 
your  needle  through  that.  Secure 
this  "imitation-knot"  with  a  couple 
of  stitches  at  the  back  as  invisibly  as 
it  can  possibly  be  done.  All  this 
unkuotted  work  will  be  found  to  be 
considerably  longer,  and  the  tassels 
formed  by  gathering  it  up  should'be 
trimmed  separately  and  comparatively 


The  Making 
o!  Fringes. 

long.     Then  trim  the  short  tassels  on 
the  Vandyke  movements. 

No.  3.     An  Easily- 
made  Fringe. 

For  this  quickly-made  and  effective 
pattern  measure  out  2-inch  spaces. 
Measure  and  mark  an  independent 
and  detached  "movement"  in  each 
space  as  illustrated.  This  fringe  looks 
best  when  worked  with  4  strands  to 
every  stitch.  Thread  through  from 
the  right  side  all  the  5  holes  of  each 
"movement,"  then  gather  up  all  the 


loops  in  your  left  hand  and  all  the 
ends  (on  the  wrong  side  of  the 
material)  in  your  right  hand.  Thread 
all  the  ends  through  the  united  group 
of  loops.  An  illustration  shows  this 
fringe  in  the  making,  the  silk  being 
tied  round  the  united  group  of  loops 
to  be  held  by  the  left  hand.  Pinning 
to  a  cushion  or  securing  by  weights 
laid  on  is,  of  course,  necessary. 
Arrange  nicely  the  pattern  thus 
formed.  Make  a  knot. 

The  2nd  and  «Jrd  rows  are  knotted 


A  STAR  D'OILY   IN   HUNGARIAN   EMBROIDERY. 


Directions  for  this  work  appear  on  page  1. 


A  Lesson  in   Netting 


No  kind  of  lace 
combines  the 
qualities  of  ele- 
gance, durability 
and  general  useful- 
ness so  much  as 
filet  lace.  It  is  most 
decorative,whether 
on  household  linen , 
such  as  tea-cloths, 
bedspreads,  tray- 
cloths,  and  a  quan- 
tity of  other  things, 
or  as  trimmings  on 
muslin  or  Shantung  silk  dresses. 
Cushion-covers  and  curtains  are  made 
both  attractive  and  valuable  when 
composed  of  netting  inlets  in  con- 
junction with  Broderie  Anglaise, 
Italian  or  French  embroidery,  and 
various  kinds  of  pillow  lace.  Filet 
lace  lasts  a  life-time — and  more — if 
carefully  washed.  And,  lastly,  it  is  a 
most  fascinating  handicraft. 

We  have  become  accustomed  to 
consider  the  art  of  making  filet  lace 
as  having  originated  in  the  Italian 
convents,  But  though  the  nuns  made 
netting  into  a  high  art  of  lace-making, 
and  as  such  handed  it  down  to  us, 
they  themselves  most  probably  got 


Hands  in  position  ready  for  the  First  Loop. 


the  idea  from  the 
Orient,  where 
em  broidery  on  net- 
ted silk-foundation 
with  gold  and 
silver  thread,  and 
all  the  rich  colours 
of  the  Orient,  was 
one  of  the  common 
forms  of  applied 
art  in  the  early 
centuries.  Where 
the  idea  first  sprang 
froin  to  make  the 


common  fishing-net  mesh  out  of  linen 
and  silk,  and  to  employ  it  for  orna- 
mental purposes,  is  not  known. 
Still  less  do  we  know  how,  when  or 
where  the  fishing  nets  themselves 
were  invented. 

Materials 
Required. 

The  implements  reqrired  for  mak- 
ing filet  lace  are  a  netting-needle, 
generally  made  of  steel,  a  flat  ivory 
niesh,  and  a  piece  of  twine  about  1^ 
yards  long.  The  material  is  linen- 
thread.  (Barbour's  3-Cord  L,ineii  Lace 
Thread.)  If  a  heavy  cushion  is  avail- 
able, the  twine  will  not  be  required. 
A  coarse  piece  of  thread  half  a  yard 


Bobbin  passed  behind  Mesh  through  Loop.  Ready  to  draw  up  the  Knot. 

9  j 


A  Lesson  in 
Netting. 


The  two  top  designs  show  respectively  a  Star  and  a  piece  of 
Square  Netting.  Just  below  is  a  sample  of  Oblique  Netting, 
and  the  bottom  design  is  an  oblong  piece  in  the  making. 


or  less  and  a  pin  will  do  for  make 
ing  the  foundation-loop  on  which 
to  commence  the  work  and  hold  the 
netting  steady  whilst  working.  If  no 
heavy  cushion  is  at  hand,  then  make 
a  loop  of  your  twine,  put  your  left 
foot  through  it  and  let  the  heel  pre- 
vent it  from  slipping  off. 

The  beginner  should  begin  on  some 
coarser  material  such  as  "Bright-eye" 
or  "Peri-lusta,"  and  a  mesh  at  least  a 
quarter  of  an  inch  wide.  The  needle 
is  forked  at  both  ends  and  has  gener- 
ally an  "eye  "  at  the  one  end.  Thread 
the  needle  and  tie  a  knot  to  secure, 
then  run  the  thread  along  both  sides 
of  the  needle  and  through  the  forks 
until  twice  the  thickness  of  the  flat 
ivory-mesh  you  mean  to  use.  (The 
beginner  should  use  a  flat  mesh,  as 
the  round  ones  are  not  so  easy  to  keep 
in  place.)  The  thread  should  now  be 

I-  10 


cut  from  the  ball  and 
tied  securely  to  the 
foundation-loop. 

Making  the 
Knot. 

Hold  the  rnesh  with 
your  right  hand, 
tightening  both  the 
thread  and  the  foun- 
dation loop.  Grasp 
the  mesh  with  your 
left  hand  and  you  hold 
it  just  as  you  hold 
your  pen  with  the 
right  hand  for  writ- 
ing. Thus  holding 
the  mesh,  with  palm 
of  the  hand  towards 
you,  bring  it  beneath 
the  thread  to  meet  the 
knot  that  joins  the 
thread  and  the  foun- 
dation-loop. Then 
bring  the  thread  with 
your  right  hand  tightly  round  the 
mesh — the  1st,  2nd  and  3rd  fingers  of 
left  hand.  (The  needle  is  held  between' 
the  thumb  and  the  first  and  second 
fingers  of  right  hand.)  Bring  the 
thread  back  between  first  and  second 
fingers  of  left  hand  and  in  under  the 
thumb,  which  should  hold  it  securely 
in  place  on  the  mesh,  first  loop.  Then 
lay  the  thread  in  a  large  semicircle 
across  the  foundation-loop  and  behind 
your  right  hand.  Holding  the  needle 
by  the  one  end.  thread  the  other 
(upper)  end  from  the  left  through  the 
first  loop,  underneath  the  mesh  but 
above  the  three  fingers  of  left  hand, 
through  the  foundation-loop  (from 
underneath  upwards).  The  upper 
point  of  the  needle  should  finally  rest 
on  the  large  semicircle  where  that 
crosses  the  foundation-loop.  Let  go 
the  lower  point  of  the  needle  and 


grasp   the    upper    one, 

draw    the    thread 

through,  catch  the  loop 

(second  loop)  with  your 

fourth  finger,   then  re- 
lease  the   thread   from 

between  the  thumb  and 

the  mesh ,  retract  second 

and  third  fingers  from 

1st  loop,  while  tighten- 
ing  it   with   the   right 

hand.      When    the    1st 

loop  is  quite  tightened 

round   the  mesh  only, 

the  fourth  finger  should 

be  withdrawn  from  the 
2nd    loop  ;    tightening 
the   thread   with    your 
right  hand  will  secure 
the  knot.      It  is  important  that 
mesh   should   be   held    in    place 
whole  time  just  beneath  the  connec- 
ting knot  and  at  a  right  angle  with  the 
foundation-loop.     Also  never  let  the 
little   finger    release    its 
hold    on    the    2nd    loop 
until     the     second     and 
third    fingers     have     re- 
leased their  hold  on  the 
1st  loop  and  that  loop  is 
tightened     round     the 
mesh.     Otherwise  the 
netting  will   be  uneven. 
The    illustrations    show 
the  correct  positions. 

Oblique  Netting. 

The  beginner  should 
practise  on  an  "oblique" 
piece  of  netting.  Make 
a  row  of,  say,  20  loops  on 
a  foundation-loop,  which 
should  be  about  4  to  6 
inches  long,  looped  at 
both  ends  and  pinned  at 
either  end  on  to  a  heavy 
cushion.  Then  draw 


Netted 
Edgings. 

the  mesh  out,  unpin, 
and  turn  your  founda- 
tion-loop, bring  the 
mesh  just  to  meet  the 
row  of  loops  and  make 
your  2nd  row  each  loop 
to  the  one  just  above 
it,  always  w  o  r  k  i  n  g 
from  the  left  to  the 
right,  unpin,  draw  the 
mesh  out  again,  and  so 
on.  The  knack  of 
making  an  even  mesh 
is  easily  acquired  in 
half  to  one  hour. 

Many  pretty  edgings 
for  tray-cloths,  etc.,  can 
be  made  on  the  oblique 

Two  Edgings  netted  obliquely.         by  using  different  sizes 
the  of  mesh,  joining  2  or  more  loops  of  the 

the  last  row  with  1  loop  of  the    row   in 

making,  or  vice  versa.  By  adding 
separately-made  wheels  we  come  very 
near  the  Armenian  lace,  which  is  also 


A  D'oily  showing  different  sizes  of  mesh. 
11 


A  Lesson  in 
Netting. 

made  by  loops  and 
knots.  The  elaborate- 
ness of  the  design 
depends,  of  course,  on 
the  ingenuity  and 
proficiency  of  the 
worker.  A  netted 
d'oily-edging  is  also 
an  oblique  netting. 
The  foundation-loop 
should  be  round,  and 
it  should  be  turned  to 
the  left  continually; 
instead  of  working 
backwards  and  for- 
wards as  in  a  piece  of 
obliquely-netted  lace, 
the  foundation-loop 
should  be  tightened 
into  the  required 
circumference  as  soon 
as  the  1st  row  of  loops 
is  made,  the  last  loop  thus  being  made 
to  meet  the  1st  one.  Then  the  netting 
is  done  round  and  ronnd.  The  more 
variety  in  the  size  of  mesh  and  the 
greater  amount  of  "fans,"  contrived 


The  Lower  Edging  has  separately 
netted  wheels. 


A  Netted  Edging  and  a  Darned  Net  Edging. 

by  means  of  joining  several  loops  of 
the  previous  row  into  one  knot,  or 
branching  off  a  number  of  loops 
from  one  single  loop  of  the  previous 
row,  the  prettier  will  the  general 
effect  be. 

Netting  a  Square  Foundation 
for  Embroidery. 

This  should  be  done  over  a  very 
fine  mesh  ;  a  flat  bone  one.  one-eighth 
of  an  inch,  is  easier  to  manipulate, 
otherwise  a  fine  knitting  needle  will 
serve  the  purpose.  Begin  by  making 
2  loops  into  the  foundation-loop, 
turn,  then  make  2  loops  in  the  last 
loop  of  every  row,  thus  increasing  by 
1  loop  until  the  requisite  width  is 
attained.  It  will  be  seen  that  all 
netting  is  done  obliquely,  a  square 
being  commenced  at  one  of  the 
corners.  Also  that  theoutsides  of  the 
netting  is  everywhere  strengthened 
by  an  additional  loop.  Thus  one 
should  always  count  2  loops  extra. 
12 


Foundations  for 
Embroidery. 


Now  when  you  have  the  2  loops  more 
.than  the  desired  width,  1  row  should 
be  netted  without  increasing.  Then 
join  the  last  2  loops  of  every  row, 
thus  decreasing  the  number  of  loops 
by  1.  When,  at  last,  there  are 
only  2  loops  left,  the  mesh  should 
be  withdrawn  before  the  final  knot 
is  secured.  If  the  increasing,  the 
straight  row,  and  the  decreasing  have 
been  done  as  directed,  the  finished 
piece  of  netting  when  stretched  out 
is  the  straight  square  ready  for  em- 
broidery. 

Oblong  Pieces  of 
Netting 

Begin  as  for  square  netting.   When 
the  width  is  attained,  and   1   row  is 


netted  without  increasing,  increase 
every  other  row  and  decrease  every 
other  (begin  by  increasing.)  When 
the  length  is  reached,  decrease  as  for 
the  square  piece. 
Knots. 

Except  when  the  thread  breaks 
accidentally,  all  the  knots  should  be 
at  the  edge-  When  the  thread  on  the 
needle  is  not  long  enough  to  last  the 
next  row  through,  it  should  be  cut 
off  to  within  an  inch  ;  the  needle 
should  be  refilled,  and  the  new  thread 
joined  on  by  means  of  a  sailor  knot 
(never  a  "granny-knot"  !)  quite  close 
to  the  last  knot  made  by  the  netting. 
Knots  within  the  netted  square  itself 
are  very  ugly  and  should  be  avoided. 


Net  being  darned  in  a  frame. 
13 


A  Lesson  in 
Netting. 

Embroidering 

on  the  Net. 

The  net  should   be   tacked  into  a 

wire-frame,   each 

corner   first  firmly 

secured    in    place. 

then    the    sides 

opposite   each 

other,    two   at  the 

time,  so  that  the  11 - 

is  evenly  stretched. 

The  stitch  mostly  used  is  the 
darning-stitch,  point  toile.  When 
consisting  of  only  2  threads  in  the 
warp  and  2  in  the  weft,  the  lace  is 
called  "  Filet  Antique."  Do  as  much 
of  the  warp  as  can  be  done  of  the 
pattern  before  beginning  the  weft. 
Only  one  "  fastening"  is  allowed,  the 
newthread  being  joined  to  the  old  one 
by  a  sailor-knot.  When  beginning 
at  a  new  spot  follow  round  the  edges 
of  the  darning,  twining  or  "over- 
sewing" round  the  thread  of  the 
netting,  when  that  can  be  followed  ; 
if  not,  take  the  nearest  way  to  the 
point  where  darning  should  recom- 
mence in  the  same  manner. 

The  same  kind  of.  thread  can   be 
used   for   darning    filet    lace    as    for 
netting  the  foundation,  or  Barbour's 
Irish  Silk  Floss  Embroidery  Thread. 
About  Meshes. 

For  the  sake  of  clearness,  the  word 
"  mesh  "  has  only  been  used  for  the 
implement  so-called.  The  netting  is 
often  called  mesh,  and  so  are  the 
loops.  An  even  piece  of  netting  is, 
for  instance,  called  "even  mesh, "and 
a  certain  number  of  loops  is  termed 
so  many  "  meshes."  This  is  quite 
correct,  but  somewhat  bewildering  in 
a  set  of  directions. 

The  worker  will  sometimes  find 
that  the  meshes  are  not  always  true, 
but  very  often  a  lead-pencil  or  a  coarse 


A  Hammock  in  Miniature. 


steel  knitting-needle  will  give  a  more 
perfect  circle  (when  a  round  mesh  is 
used).      This,    however,    the    worker 
will  soon  find  out 
for  herself. 

How  to  Make  a 
Hammock. 

Some  girls  may 
want  to  start  some- 
thing really  useful 
and  will  like  to 

attempt  a  hammock.  Any  strong  kind 
of  twine  should  be  used  for  this,  and 
a  very  big  netting-needle.  The  ham- 
mock is  netted  obliquely,  40  loops 
in  every  row  throughout  the  entire 
length  of  the  hammock. 

The  foundation-loop  should  go  over 
the  foot,  as  the  material  is  too  heavy 
for  pinning  the  work  on  to  a  weighted 
cushion.  For  netting  the  1st  and  2nd 
rows,  a  thin  but  strongly-bound  book 
should  be  used  as  mesh.  Then  35 
to  40  rows  (according  to  the  length 
desired)  are  netted  over  a  wooden 
mesh  lg  inches  wide,  and  the  last  2 
rows  are  again  netted  across  the  same 
book  as  was  used  for  the  first  2  rows. 
The  foundation-loop  should  be 
moved  from  time  to  time  as  the  work 
grows,  threading  il  through  every 
mesh  of  the  last  but  one  completed 
row.  This  should  be  repeated  when- 
ever the  work  has  grown  to  such  a 
length  as  to  be  uncomfortably  near 
the  worker's  face.  When  the  netting 
of  the  hammock  is  complete,  the  final 
knot  should  be  strengthened  by  an 
additional  knot.  The  mesh  should 
be  withdrawn  from  the  loop  before 
securing  this  knot. 

Now  gather  up  all  the  loops  of  the 
last  row  in  your  left  hand,  run  the 
twine  6  times  through  and  join  all 
six  rings  thus  formed  into  one,  either 
by  crocheting  or  buttonholing  (also 


14 


with  the  twine).  This  makes  an 
extra  strong  ring  to  fasten  the  ham- 
mock 011  to  a  tree.  A  similar  ring 
should  be  made  by  taking  up  the 
loops  of  the  1st  row.  It  will  be  found 
that  they  are  "  looped  "  at  the  end  as 
they  were  netted  on  to  the  already  with- 


An Effective  Dress 
Trimming. 

drawn  foundation-loop.  These  little 
knots  are  easily  undone  by  stretching 
each  loop  separately.  The  end  of 
twine  at  the  very  beginning  of  the 
netting  should  also  be  secured.  And 
the  two  strong  rings  for  the  cord 
should  be  exactly  alike  at  either  end. 


Dress  Trimming  in   Rhodes 
Embroidery  or  Punched  Work, 


Collars 

and  Cuffs 

!  w  o  u  1  d 

look 

effective 

in    this 

style  of 

work. 


*  «  * 
**  * 

Sr**  %*%  * 
f 


*  *  *      • 
*-*  %  -•'    •• 
1st  «  $..-»  t, 


•     «  *  *• 

*»» 

%  »  *  *  «. 


%-%-V-'*  *  *  * 
>»***»»* 
*>«**< 

*•»  *  *  * 
--**»• 
»<*•*      *«»» 

**-«*t     y 
t »  v  «  « 

-*•«  «  cH'i  , 
«,4T  f  %  %  «,  e  <* 

^'>#* 

.      JM"  »  *"»  * 


* 
« 

k.»» 
\  «  % 

»  »   <»  » 

% 

* 

%  • 

.|r 

»  * 

»*  «  * 

«• 

f 

"N«p< 

Vr  * 
>  «  * 

*•-»* 

J*.,*'»>" 

41  «* 
*  « 
•» 

-  4> 

4T'^ 
•    * 

<f* 

"»  * 
#•« 
•*  « 
»  % 

*  % 
,~* 

*  * 

*W*    :** 
I*  j(f 

*«"»%» 

'i 

"s 

'% 

» 
« 

i*i 

i^, 

« 
« 

%. 
-» 

^ 

•^ 
^ 
» 
t» 

••«»*•» 
•**%  *,«.* 
•  *  *   8 
':      »  »«• 
**»*«, 
»***«, 
**<»,«  % 
<»  *  •*-%  « 
»  *  "'  «  # 

« 

1 
%. 

» 
% 

%  A 

*#i<w*-' 

^ 

»  r 
*-* 

•      ^0*4  %^|N*Si4 

*'**>SH| 

««*»* 

y    *^V*. 
V                *** 

*^g|f    ••**   , 

r  \     i  »  *  •*  * 

•--.  j  #  *.*  i-.-^ 

«;•»•*«  •-r-V.a 
^»**«jr.*  ^.;~ 
»  «%  V  »  r^aa*,-  •- 

* 

** 
"» 

^** 

^.^^ 

J  ;:^-: 

•  '*>i, 

#*• 

*••"*».  «t  «  % 
'     ».*>«' 
*V*> 

#• 
|t 

* 

•» 

* 

% 

'-    "   -     :;"ff 

i» 

>j 

*  * 
*  * 
«  ^ 

#  »1f.y  «%"::. 
•^  A  •  «    -    •.* 

«»  <FV  ,: 

Beautiful  trimmings  for  dresses 
made  of  some  material  of  an  open 
texture  can  very  easily  be  made  in 
this  popular  style  of  fancy  work. 
Any  geometrical  design  can  be  traced 
on  the  fabric,  such  as  that  illustrated 
here,  then  the  outside  edge  is  worked 
over  with  overcasting  stitch  ;  the 
openwork  section  is  done  on  the 
counted  threads.  Commencing  at 
the  first  3  threads  inside  the  line  at 
the  left  side,  with  fine  linen  thread 
and  a  very  coarse  tapestry  needle, 
insert  the  needle  between  the  3rd  and 


4th  threads  in  the  fabric,  from  the 
top,  catch  the  end  of  the  thread 
as  it  follows  the  needle,  bring  the 
latter  up  before  the  1st  thread  in  a 
horizontal  line,  then  pass  it  down 
through  the  1st  hole  again,  crossing 
the  end  of  the  thread  to  secure  it, 
bring  it  up  through  the  2nd  hole  and 
down  through  the  1st  again,  *  pass 
the  needle  diagonally  on  the  back 
and  bring  it  up  through  the  3rd  and 
4th  threads  in  a  perpendicular  line 
below  the  2nd  hole,  insert  between 
the  3rd  and  4th  threads  in  a  horizontal 


15 


An  Effective  Dress 
Trimming. 

line  with  the  last 
hole,  and  bring  it  up 
again  through  the 
preceding  hole,  then 
down  through  the 
hole  to  the  right,  * 
repeat  to  the  end  of 
the  Istperpendicular 
line  of  openwork  in 
the  design,  turn  the  work 
upside  down  and  repeat 
over  next  3  threads  and 
continue  in  this  way  until 
all  the  perpendicular  lines 
are  worked,  then  turn  the 
work  the  other  way  and 
work  the  horizontal  lines 
in  exactly  the  same  man- 
ner. The  lower  edge  is 
worked  in  buttonhole 
stitch  with  coarse  embroid- 
ery cotton  and  the  cen- 
tre flower  with  the  same 
kind  of  thread.  Make  a 
hole  in  the  very  centre 
of  the  motif  with  the 
coarse  needle,  then 
work  a  row  of  button- 
hole stitch  around  it, 
using,  of  course,  an  ordi- 
nary embroidery  needle 
for  the  purpose.  The 
petals  are  worked  thus  :  After  finish- 
ing the  centre  bole  pu!  a  stitch  on  the 
edge  of  the  first  one  or  two  stitches  to 
get  the  thread 
exactly  opposite 
the  centre  of 
one  of  the  little 
squares  that 
surround  this 
centre,  stretch 
the  thread  along 
the  centre  and 
make  a  stitch 
in  about  the 


The  Berlin  Wool-work  Designs  on  this  page 
are  described  iu  the  next  article. 


Suitable  for  a  Cushion  : 

Background  dark  brown, 

Cross-bars   gold.  Centre 

Design  cream. 


Variety  can  often  be  obtained  by 

combining   one    or  two   Simple 

Motifs. 


A  Neat  Design  for  Waistbelt, 

in  three  colours  to  harmonise 

with  the  Gown. 


4th  thread  from  the 
edge,   insert   the 
needle  in   the  edge 
of     the     buttonhole 
stitch  through  which 
it     conies    out    and 
stretch   another 
thread    to    the    top 
stitch  where  you  run 
the  needle  under  the  same 
thread  in  the  fabric;  this 
gives  3  threads  over  which 
you  work   darning    stitch 
from  side  to  side,  taking 
alternately  two  and  one  of 
the  threads  on  the  needle 
down  to  the  centre,  where 
you  pass  the  stitch  through 
the     buttonhole     stitches 
until  exactly  opposite  the 
centre     of     next     square, 
where  you   repeat    the 
petal,    and    so    on    all 
round  for  the  8  petals. 
The  material  is  next  cut 
away  from  the  outside 
of  the  buttonhole  edg- 
ing. 

Collars,  revers,  and 
cuffs  in  this  pattern  will 
give  a  very  dainty  finish 
to  the  costume  made  of 
linen,  and  of  course,  may  be,  with 
advantage,  worked  on  a  coarser 
material  of  a  contrasting  colour,  or 
white.  Har- 
danger  canvas 
is  a  very  suit- 
able material 
for  the  white 
or  ecru  work , 
and  so  are  the 
new  shirting 
canvasses  of 
m  ercerised 
cotton. 


mnm 


Rose  pink,  pale  green  anc 

white  would  combine  wel 

for  the  above  Design. 


16 


Berlin  Woodwork. 


The  revival  of 
the  tnid-Victorian 
Berlin  wool-work 
is  a  useful  one. 
Like  every  form 
of  needlecraft,  it 
has  been  abused, 
and  always  will 
be  abused  if  it 
gets  into  the, 
hands  o^f  "the 
inartistic  worker, 
who  has  neither 
good  judgment —  Suitable  for  Inlets 

nor  a  good   pattern — to   guide 
her.     But  when  treated  artisti- 


for  a  Cushion. 


t  i  onal  .  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  its 
very  convention- 
ality is  an  advan- 
tage in  many 
instances, 
because  a  worker 
who  has  the 
sense  to  know 
when  her  powers 
are  only  very 
limited  can  get  a 
good  motif,  and 
repeat  it  with 


excellent  effect,  without  any 
demand  on  artistic   percep- 


icse  Bells  would  look  pretty  for 
a  Fancy  Work  Bag. 


cally,  and 
used  in  the 
right  place, 
this  work 
has  very 
desirable 
qualities, 
and  is  to  be 
preferred 
to  many  of 
the  looser, 
coarse 
forms  of 
embroid- 
ery, even 
though  it 
may  be 
much  more 
c  o  n  v  e  n  - 


A  simple  pattern 
for  a  Fancy 
Waistcoat. 


A  Bold  Design  in 


three  colours  for  a  Cushion  Centre 
or  a  Footstool. 

17 


Waved  lines  in  various  shades  of 
the  same  colour  are  effective. 


t  i  o  n  ,  or 
clever 
workman- 
ship  — 
which  may 
be  beyond 
her. 

The good 
w  earing 
quality  of 
this  work 
is  undeni- 
able; the 
c  a  n  v  a  s 
gives  a 
staying 
power  to 
the  whole, 
and  the 


Berlin  Wool 
Work. 


.it  can  be  seen,  as  be  rolled  up  aiid  put 
away  to  make  a  happy  hunting  ground 
for  moth!"  And  tl  :n  she  told  me 
how,  in  her  early  married  life,  when 
her  husband — a  Member  of  Parlia- 


:;:;: 


A  Design,  in  black,  violet,  heliotrope  and 
white.    Could   be  used   iu  various  ways- 

thickness  of  the  crossed  wool  or 
thread  makes  a  thoroughly  strong 
firm  substance  when  completed. 

I  saw  a  most  interesting  example  of 
the   durability   of  this  work   in  the 
home  of  the  late  Mrs.  Emma  Brewer, 
whose    name   was   so 
well     known    to    the 
older   readers  of  The 
Girl's  Own  Paper, 

The  long  corridors 
in  her  flat  were 
carpeted  witlrHengths 
of  this  work,  most 
exquisitely  worked,  in 
aconveiitional  pattern 
in  which  dark  tones 
predominated,  but 
were  relieved  with 


If  you  thought  of 
Design  would 


A  quiet  device  that  could  be  used  as  a 
Belt,  a  Cushion,  or  a  Teapot  Mat. 

brighter  touches  of  colour.  The  work 
was  the  width  of  moderately  wide 
stair  carpet,  and  in  lengths  each 
several  yards  long.  When  I  remarked 
on  the  beauty  of  the  work,  and 
exclaimed  against  such  handiwork 
being  walked  upon,  Mrs.  Brewer 
smiled  in  her  way — which  was  a 
very  charming  way — and  said,  "But, 
my  dear  child,  it  may  just  as  well  be 
serving  a  useful  purpose,  and  where 


Bands    of    trimming  like   the    three- 
colour  blocks  above  would   look  well 
at  the  edge  of  plain  Winter  Curtains, 
such  as  serge  or  rep. 

ment — was  often  late 
at  the  House,  she 
used  to  fill  up  the 
time  by  doing  this 
work  while  waiting 
up  for  him.  In  those 
Victorian  days  the 
gentlewomen  did 
great  things  in  the 
way  of  needlework, 
and  there  is  every 
indication  that  the 
reign  of  Queen  Mary 
will  show  some  equally  fine  records. 
But  though  everyone  may  not  have 
the  courage  to  attempt  such  large 
pieces  of  work  as  these  strips  done  by 
Mrs.  Brewer,  there  are  scores  of  less 
ambitious  ways  in  which  the  work 
can  be  used  to  great  advantage.  Only 
remember  this:  its  great  beauty  lies 


trying  a  Mat,  this 
look  very  well. 


A  Crazy  Pattern  that  will  amuse  children. 


IS 


Above  is  a  Design  that  would  look 

well    for    Belts,    or    for    trimming 

Children's  Winter  Frocks. 


in  a  right 
selection 
of  colour. 
And  here 
the  mod- 
ern work- 
er has  an 
immense 
advantage 

over  the  earlier  workers.  Silks  and 
wools  are  now  obtainable  in  a  variety 
of  delicate  and  beautiful  shades  that 
would  have  fairly  dazzled  our  ances- 
tresses. Baldwin's  Beehive  Fingering 
can  be  had  in  a  number  of  beautiful 
colours,  and  is  very  suitable.  And  to 
these  must  be  added  the  wonderful 
range  now  available  in  the  mercerised 
cottons,  and  the  various  pretty  glossy 
threads,  such  as  Peri-Lusta,  that 
in  oder  n 
i  11  genu  i  t  y 
lias  produc- 
ed from 
wood  fibre ! 
All  these 
Avear  well, 
.and  though 
the  cotton 
threads  may 
not  be  quite 
.as  lasting  as  the  wools,  they  do  well 
-for  things  that  are  not  required  to 
live  indefinitely,  and  are  only  wanted 
rfor  a  time. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  men's  fancy 
-waistcoats,  for  instance,  or  dress 
trimmings,  or  girls' waistbelts,  should 
last  for  a  generation.  If  they  serve  a 
•couple  of  seasons,  that  is  usually 
•enough  ;  one  is  tired  of  the  pattern 
'by  then,  and  craving  something 
new ;  for  these  the  mercerised 
threads  are  usually  all  that 
can  be  desired.  On  the  other 
;h  a  n  d  ,  for  cushions,  bags, 


This  would  look  well  in  Bands 

as  a  dress-trimming  for  serge 

or  cloth. 


Carried    out  in  apple  green 

diamonds,     out/lined      with 

black,  and  completed  with 

white. 


Small 
Designs. 

fancy   strips  for  chairs  and  such- 
like  upholstery,  where  the  work 
will  be  acceptable,  and  delightful, 
and  useful  for  as  long  as  ever  it 
can  be  made  to  last,  a  good  quality 
wool,    with    dyes    guaranteed    to 
fade  as  little  as  possible  will  be  the 
best    to    use,    and   the  beauty    of 
this  will  be  greatly  enhanced  if  a 
stout   rope 
silk,      or 
E  s  p  1  e  n 
D ' o  r ,     is 
introduced- 
in     touches. 
It      will 
brighten  the 
work   and 
give  it  rich- 
n  e  s  s     and 
character. 

As  a  general  rule,  this  work  looks 
best  when  it  consists  of  a  repeated 
simple  conventional  design.  Now 
and  again  one  comes  on  sprays  of 
flowers,  birds,  and  such-like  subjects 
that  have  been  produced  with  good 
effect,  but  these  are  exceptional  • 
more  often  they  look  crude  and  ang- 
ular ;  whereas  a  small  recurring  pat- 
tern has  charm  of  its  own  in  its  very 
simplic- 
ity a  n  d 
mono 
tony.  One 
point 
a  b  o  v  t 
this  work 
will  es- 
p  ecially 
commend 
it  to  the  girl  with  small  pocket  money, 
and  that  is  the  cheapness  of  the  material 
as  compared  with  work  done  on  linen 
or  any  other  material  that  is  to  show- 
when  the  work  is  finished. 


The  Design  above  is  most  suited 
to  a  Fancy  Bag.  This  work  looks 
well  if  used  for  the  lower  half  of 
the  Bag,  the  upper  half  being  of 
silk. 


19 


Pincushions  in  Cut  Work. 


A  Crescent- 

shaped 

Pincushion. 

To  make  this 
pretty  pin- 
cushion, com- 
m  e  n  c  e  by 
following  with 
a  fine  needle 
the  line  on  one 
side  of  the 
figure  with 
small  casting 
•  sts.  Then  work 
down  the  other 
side  until  you 
come  to  where 
the  first  bar  is 
to  be  placed. 
Take  a  st  across, 
making  a  bar 
between  the 
two  lines  (see 
Fig,  1).  Now 
1  st  back.  Fas- 
ten these  sts 


firmly.     Take 


1  more  st 
across  and 
fasten  in 
the  oppo- 
site side. 
You  have 
nowabarof 
3  threads. 
Turn  your 
needle,  and 
ho  1 d  i  n  g 
the  point 
between 
your  finger 
and  thumb, 
work  with 
the  blunt 
end  over 
and  over 
the  threads 


A    CItESUENT-SHAPED    PINCUSHION. 


A  KETICELLA  PINCUSHION. 


of  the  bar  until, 
with  close,  even 
sts,  you  reach 
the  opposite 
side.  Turn 
your  needle 
again  and  con- 
tinue basting 
around  until 
the  next  bar  is 
reached,  when 
the  process  is 
repeated. 

When  the 
bars  are  finish- 
ed,  cut  the 
material  away 
beneath,  being 
careful  not  to 
cut  the  bars. 
Free  the  bars 
with  your 
needle,  and 
work  all  round 
the  design  with 
the  simple  over 
and  over 
binding  st. 
The  back 
of  the  piii- 
cushion 
may  be  em- 
broidered 
the  same  as 
the  front, 
or  left 
plain,  but 
both  edges 
are  scallop- 
e  d  and 
button- 
holed,  and 
eyelet  holes 
worked 
near  the 
edge, 


Fig.  1.     MAKING   THE  BARS  AND  CUTTING  AWAY  THE   MATERIAL 

through  which  ribbon  is  run.  The 
pincushion  is  finished  with  a  bow  on 
each  end,  allowing  a  good  length  for 
hanging  it.  Worked  entirely  in 
white  and  laid  over  pink,  with  pink 
ribbons,  the  effect  is  very  beautiful. 

A  Reticella  Pincushion. 

The  square  pincushion  is  rather 
•more  difficult  than  the  other,  but 
even  here,  the  great  essential  is  care, 
and  if  the 
work  is  fol- 
lowed step 
by  step,  as 
shown  in 
the  working 
directions 
{Fig. 2),  even 
this  will  be 
found  to  be 
within  the 
possibilities 
of  the  aver- 
age worker. 

Start  with 
the  middle 
figure. 
Pierce  a  hole 
in  the  centre 


Working 
Details. 


and  button- 
hole round, 
with  the 
purl  sts  on 
the  outside. 

Then  make 
a  2nd  row  of 
loose  button- 
hole sts  in 
every  2nd  st, 
after  which 
take  1  bind- 
i  ng  st  in 
each  of  those 
loose  loops  to 
make  them 
firmer  and 
stronger. 

The  3rd  row  consists  of  a  series  of 
triangles,  all  worked  in  buttonhole  st. 
Fill  the  1st  hole  with  sts,  turn,  and 
work  back  on  top  of  them.  Take  a 
2nd  row  of  buttonhole  sts  on  top, 
only  making  this  row  2  sts  less  than 
the  1st,  work  back  again.  Continue 
until  there  is  only  1  st  left.  Then 
take  a  few  overcasting  sts  down  the 


Fig. 


WORKING  THE   CENTRAL  FIGURE- 
FIGURE  AND  SOLID  EMBROIDERY. 


HEART-SHAPED 


21 


Pincushions  in 
Cut  Work. 

side  of  the    triaiigle,    and   start   the 
next  triangle  in  the  2nd  hole. 

Baste  round  the  circle  which  en- 
closes the  central  figure.  This  is 
also  buttonholed  round.  As  the 
circle  is  worked,  the  triangles  are 
connected  with  the  crossing  bars, 
which,  as  will  be  seen,  are  of  the 
thread  twisted  over  and  over.  As  the 
embroidery  is  done,  the  material  is 
carefully  cut  away  on  the  wrong  side. 


For  the  heart-shaped  figures,  first 
take  small  basting  sts  round,  then  a 
row  of  close  buttonhole  stitching, 
and  on  top  of  that  a  row  of  loose 
buttonholing.  A  few  sts  are  then 
carried  across  to  fill  the  figure  in. 

Make  the  upper  and  under  side  of 
the  pincushion  cover  of  the  same 
size,  and  hemstitch  each  to  the  depth 
of  an  inch.  Then  lace  with  cord. 


•9* 


.     J»*     *#***»     :  ' 

!-:i!5r;:;;. 


•  •»•     •«••     v     a  .     •••»  *••»       i     *     ••!•     •«•  *^«t« 


:::::::s::::H:::5:::ir  :;jji 

^iS^'ass^iS'^-^K^^ss'^-s^'ass^ 
<•??:  >*l?s  *i«. «:•*  «:?*  SB:%  ssn  ?«•;  »  « 


AOOBN  DE8IGN  IN  DAKKED  FILET  NET. 


22 


Filet  Lace  Squares. 


A  DESIGN  SHOWING  SIMPLE  OUTLINES. 

Filet  brode  or  darned  net,  now 
coming  so  much  to  the  front,  is  a 
most  fascinating  form  of  fancy-work, 
and  not  so  difficult  as  it  may  seem  to 
the  inexperienced  worker.  The  point 
to  be  most  particular  about  is  to  see 
that  the  right  thread  is  used,  as  this 
makes  a  great  difference  to  the  work. 

The  first  step  is  the  netted  back- 
ground— this  is  made  in  the  ordinary 
way  with  a  mesh,  according  to  size 
desired.  For  this  part  of  the  work 
use  Harbour's  3-cord  Linen  Lace 
Thread. 


The  square  or  strip  thus  obtained, 
is  then  stretched  on  a  wire  frame 
(these  frames  are  to  be  obtained  in 
any  large  needlework  department). 

The  design  is  now  carried  out  in 
"point  de  toile"  or  darning  stitch, 
with  a  rather  blunt  needle,  and  thread 
(the  thread  should  be  a  little  finer 
than  the  mesh).  Barbour's  Irish  Silk 
Floss  Embroidery  Thread  is  suitable 
for  this. 

After  tying  thread  to  the  mesh 
with  the  needle,  pass  alternately  over 
and  under  a  thread  of  the  mesh, 


23 


Filet  Lace 
Squares. 


•***»*•*  *£ifliif  ****** 


AN  EFFECTIVE  PA.TTEBN. 

according  to  design  ;  an  effort  should 
be  made  to  connect  the  design  as  far 
as  possible,  thus  avoiding  open 
spaces.  Continue  to  fill  in  the  holes 
with  two  or  three  threads,  now  work 
over  and  under  these  threads  cross- 
wise, giving  darned  effect. 

The  work  is  more  easily  accom- 
plished by  beginning  at  the  corner 
of  a  design— but  great  care  must  be 
taken  in  counting  the  number  of 


holes,  etc.,  as  a  mistake  is  so  easily 
made.  Knots  must  be  avoided  ;  when 
taking  a  new  thread  attach  to  last 
with  a  very  small  knot  which  becomes 
invisible  in  the  darning. 

The  squares  illustrated  are  most 
effective  for  inserting  in  table-linen, 
etc.  The  same  design  worked  in  a 
finer  make  of  mesh  and  thread  make 
a  very  elaborate  finish  to  a  frock  or 
blouse. 


Catalan    Embroidery. 


A 

Handsome 
Centrepiece 
in  Catalan 
Embroid- 
ery. 


An 

enlarged 
s  e  c  t  i  o  n 
appears  on 
ano t he  r 
page. 


The  Centrepiece. 

The  drawing  should  be  traced  upon 
a  large  square  of  linen  or  oatmeal 
cloth.  (Pencil  marks  will  soil  the 
threads).  Fix  the  material  very  firmly 


into  an  embroidery  frame.  Cover  the 
whole  with  fine  butter-muslin  or 
white  paper.  Cut  a  door  and  pin 
back  whilst  working.  This  method 
keeps  the  work  from  becoming  soiled. 


TEA  CLOTH  BORDEB. 


The  directions  are  the 
as  for  the  Butterfly. 


25 


Catalan 
Embroidery. 

Use  Goto  n  Perle  "Lustrous" 
D.M.C.,  No.  8. 

Begin  with  the  "mesh"  or  net- 
stitch.  This  is  very  simple  work, 
merely  tiny  loops  worked  evenly  back 
and  forth.  Work  this  "mesh"  in 
and  out  between  the  drawing,  taking 
care  that  each  side  is  sewn  well 
within  the  flower,  leaf,  and  outer 
edges,  otherwise  the  stitches  may 
break  away  when  the  material  is  cut 
out  underneath. 


with  snow  knots.  To  make  the  snow 
knots  use  double  thread  and  leave 
tiny,  even  loops  upon  the  upper 
surface  of  material.  After  the  leaves 
are  embroidered  fill  in  the  bare  spaces 
with  these  snow  knots  or  very  small 
cross-stitch.  Finish  off  all  outer 
edges  of  flowers  and  leaves  with  a 
firm  buttonhole  stitch. 

The  trunk  and  all  narrow  sprays 
are  merely  smooth  satin  stitches. 

When  all  is  finished,  remove  from 


HP*£  %-wM>V$ti^       Xfct>;vj^:; 

* 


This  Butterfly 
is  a  very  hand- 
some specimen 
of  Catalan 
Embroidery. 


The 

stitches  are 

not  difficult, 

but  great   care 

is  required. 


Now  commence  work  upon  the 
rose  by  making  tiny  cross  or  back 
stitches  between  each  petal.  Pad 
these  petals  with  any  kind  of  soft, 
white  thread.  Carefully  embroider 
each  portion  of  the  flower  and  finish 
off  with  a  narrow  buttonhole  stitch 
all  around  the  outside.  This  will 
hold  flower  and  mesh  firmly  together. 

In  the  smaller  flowers  there  is  no 
padding.  The  centres  can  be  cut 
out  for  tiny  openwork,  or  filled  in 


frame  and  work  a  narrow  buttonhole 
edging  all  around  the  outside  of  the 
embroidery.  Turn  over,  cut  away 
the  material  from  under  the  mesh, 
also  from  the  buttonhole  edging. 

The   insertions    illustrated   are 
worked  in  the  same  way. 
The  Butterfly. 

A  square  of  coarse  linen  or  oatmeal 
cloth  is  needed. 

The   design  should  first  be  drawn 
upon    paper.      If     drawn    upon    the 


26 


Simple 
Insertions 


A  NARROW  INSERTION. 

material  great  care  must  be  taken, 
otherwise  the  pencil  marks  will  soil 
the  threads.  Commence  by  running 
a  single  thread  around  all  the  draw- 
ing. Use  Ardern's  new  "  Lustrous  " 
Thread.  Work  a  tight,  but  narrow, 
buttonhole  stitch  around  the  upper 
parts  of  wing  and  lower  parts  of 
body  and  tail. 

Now  fix  material  very  tightly  in  an 
embroidery  frame.  Work  head  and 
the  half-hoops  with  a  firm  satin- 
stitch.  Between  these  hoops  and 
between  the  buttonhole  work  of 
wings  sew  tiny  stitches,  drawing  the 
linen  threads  apart,  as  in  Rhodes 
Kmbroidery. 

Upper  Wings. 

Cut  away  the   un worked   material 


from  the  upper  parts  of  wings  close 
to  the  buttonhole  work,  making  2 
holes  on  both  sides  of  the  open- 
worked  parts. 

Around  each  of  these  holes  make 
from  10  to  14  loop  stitches.  Don't 
draw  them  too  tightly,  or  the  work 
will  pucker  when  washed.  Now 
return  to  the  top  of  the  hole  and  work 
upon  it  a  small  ring  of  3  threads. 
Into  this  ring  cast  on  6  long  threads, 
passing  each  thread  through  a  small 
loop  at  the  bottom  of  hole.  At  the 
top  of  these  6  threads  make  a  small 
tassel-knot.  Take  a  needleful  of  very 
long  thread.  Sew  it  firmly  into  this 
tassel-knot.  Take  2  of  the  6  long 
threads  and  darn  them  closely  back 
and  forth  until  nearly  at  the  bottom 


A 

Design 
compo«se»l 
of  Satin 
Sti  tc  h 
and  Net 
Stitch. 


27 


Catalan 
Embroidery. 

of  the  hole.  Pass  the 
needle  here  and  there 
through  one  of  the 
tiny  side  loops,  fasten- 
ing each  firmly.  Con- 
tinue darning  until  at 
the  bottom,  first 
arou nd  the  lower 
threads  and  finish 
with  fancy  knot. 
When  2  of  the  6 
threads  have  been 
darned  on  both  sides, 
return  to  the  2  long 
threads  in  the  middle, 
darn  in  the  same 
manner,  but  continue 
until  almost  at  the 
bottom  of  hole,  thus 
forming  the  point. 
Finish  with  fancy 
knot. 

Lower  Left  and 
Right  Wings. 

Begin  the  outer  edge,  and  near  the 
head,  with  a  narrow  buttonhole 
stitch,  gradually  making  it  much 
wider  towards  the  bottom.  Care 
must  be  taken  that  the  sides  are 
even. 


AN  ENLARGED  SECTION  OF 
THE   CENTREPIECE. 


Cut  out  material  and  make  19  small 
stitches  upon  the  sides  of  the  hole, 
commencing  in  the  middle.  This 
done,  return  to  top  of  hole  and  work 
4  threads  across  for  a  ring,  buttonhole 
it  and  cast  on  19  long  threads.  Pass 
each  thread  into  a  loop  at  the  side 


THIS  INSERTION  IS  WORKED  IN  THE  SAME 
MANNER  AS  THE   CENTREPIECE. 


28 


of  liole  and  continue  until  each  is 
finished.  Return  to  top  and  button- 
hole very  firmly  twice  across  the  19 
threads,  close  to  ring.  Split  these 
threads  into  groups  of  4,  on  either 
side,  leaving  3  for  the  middle.  Darn 
down  the  4  threads,  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  the  upper  wing,  as  far 
as  the  1st  loop  at  the  sides.  Finish 
off  each  with  fancy  knots.  The  3 


A  Handsome 
Cushion  Cover. 

long  middle  threads  must  be  darned 
until  nearly  at  the  bottom  of  hole 
and  finish  with  knots. 

Around  the  body  work  a  very 
narrow  and  firm  buttonhole  stitch, 
and  fill  in  with  Rhodes  Embroidery 
(or  Punched  Work).  The  tail  is  filled 
in  with  woven  wheels, 

The  tea-cloth  corner  is  worked  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  butterfly. 


A   CUSHION    COVKU    IN    BARO   EMBROIDERY. 


For  directions  see  next  page. 


29 


The  New  Baro  Embroidery. 


Ill 


;•;,""<«              •     !|M         :•«  %affl 

1 ... »'<..•    •'"    ffllllf     •:                          <ll                                                ,-,/ff''"^** **H  -llftM  -           ...  *W  "•    '•-;«.'"••'*' 

^  18   •«  «^v''  -   W  •  -  W  q*  ™|  .;:^ 

8^te,vflr^  .€  ^Hff;  ij > 

^   fe?«,     /    C  "»,"•"  *''•*        '  «!    il^l 

itf^' .-»"'';    -|6f-            '  AW|i        |      ..    .  •%-    *      ;:•.!•              '     •          ,».  ,|/'    /V*^' 

'?  A  %  .>  ,,14,            a®    '  1U,  ^f^^ 

^      '         «  JS»                    "MWI  *    *                                  ^IMMMfl^^         ;    I'JHtH  iff          ^^ 


««llll 


rli  /li|^iii li/J!i? Ill 
fiiifffffiiftiififfiifillrff 


A  Handsome  copyright  Design,  by  th( 
Broderie  Russe  Co. 


It  really  seems  nowadays  as  if  needle- 
work and  embroidery  were  made  so 
simple  that  most  effective  results  can 
be  produced  with  a  minimum  of 
trouble  and  difficulty.  In  the  new 
Baro  work,  of  which  some  exquisite 
samples  are  illustrated  on  these  pages, 
there  is  no  drawing  of  threads  that  is 
so  trying  to  the  eyes.  All  that  are 
required  are  a  little  care  and  patience, 
and  the  work  is  quite  within  the 
possibilities  of  anyone  who  can  do 
buttonhole  stitch  and  binding  stitch, 
Avhich  is  simply  an  over  and  over 
stitch. 

Materials 
Required. 

The  materials  required  are  few  and 
simple.  First  there  is  the  design, 
which  can  be  bought  ready  traced  on 
to  the  material  for  d'oilies,  tea-cloths, 
•cushion-covers,  or  practically  any- 
thing else.  Then  a  sharp  pair  of 


.  embroidery  scisso.rs  will  be  required, 
a  crewel  needle,  and  some  Baro 
embroidery  thread. 

How  the  Work 
is  Done. 

The  first  thi  ig  to  do  is  to  buttonhole 
stitch  the  design  all  round  (binding 
stitch  may  be  used  for  this  part  of  the 
work  if  preferred,  but  buttonholing  is 
the  most  general).  This  must  be  done 
before  any  of  the  cutting  is  com- 
menced, or  the  material  will  fray  and 
be  spoilt.  Now  take  the  scissors  and 
snip  along  the  lines  marked  in  the 
diagram  AA  to  BB.  Around  the  little 
bar  thus  formed,  sew  firmly  over  and 
over  in  simple  binding  stitch,  keeping 
the  point  of  the  needle  in  the  hand 
and  working  with  the  other  end,  as 
this  is  so  much  easier.  When  this  bar 
is  finished,  cut  on  the  adjoining  lines 
C  D,  and  work  in  the  same  way.  Con- 
tinue to  work  in  this  way  over  the 


30 


Easier  than 
it  looks. 


BBC 


cloth.  It  is  really  £ 
best  to  snip  the 
bars  for  the  width 
of  the  work  first, 
as  it  is  then  pos- 
sible to  continue 
sewing  over  and 
over  without  stop- 
ping to  cut  in 
between.  When 
the  other  side  of 
the  cloth  is  reached. 
s:iip  down  the  next  set  of  lines  and 
work  back  again  in  the  same  way. 

Over  the  vertical  bars  H  (which  are 
formed  by  the  previous  stitches,  and 
do  not  need  to  be  cut),  the  same  over 
and  over  stitch  is  worked,  and  a  cross- 
stitch  is  made  where  the  horizontal 
and  vertical  bars  intersect  one  another. 

Any  further  embroidery  stitches  can 


Diagram  showing  method  of 
working. 


now  be  added  to  the 
solid  part  of  the 
design,  and  a  most 
suitable  finish  to 
this  handsome 
work  is  an  edge  of 
Cluny  lace. 

As  will  be  seen 
from  the  samples 
of  work  we  illus- 
trate, t  h  e  back- 
ground mesh  can 
be  varied,  some  being  squares,  some 
more  oblong,  etc.  A  clever  worker 
soon  gets  to  make  many  varieties. 

Where  to  Get 
the  Requisites. 

This  work  is  suitable  for  various 
purposes,  and  looks  very  beautiful 
when  made  into  curtains  or  bed- 
spreads. But  the  worker  who  does 


mmm*  .m&w 

W& 

^^^^0^^^&^^M 


A  finished  piece  of  work,  from  a  copyright  design  by 
the  Broderie  Russe  Co. 

31 


The  New  Baro 

Embroidery. 


not  want 

i  '^3- 

to  attempt 

f)V' 

so    much 
at      the 

ffll 

start  may 

be    gjad 

to    know 

/f\ 

that  it  is 

I 

equally 

effective 

% 

made 

s 

up  into 

^JS 

smaller 

articles, 

fc       i 

JL  .       J 

and    de- 

'H 

signs  can 
be   pur- 
chased 
traced  for 

t/p 
'~'*?~ 

d  'oilies 

m^as^ 

&.  ?•.  ^o^T*       "VJ 


Starting  a  piece  of  work. 


Baro  em- 
broidery 
strength- 
ens the 
fabric  , 
and  gives 
it  a  n 
added 
lease  of 
life,  since 
every 
thread  in 
the  back- 
grou  n  d 
is  gone 
over 
again 
with 
the  em- 
broidery 


and  tray-cloths,  nightdress  cases,  etc. 
These  designs  and  all  requisites  for 
the  embroidery  can  be  obtained  from 
the  Broderie  Russe  Co.,  289,  Regent 
Street,  London,  W. 

One  of  the  admirable  qualities  of 
this  work  is  its  durability.  Whereas 
drawn  threads  often  weaken  the  fabric, 
no  matter  how  beautiful  the  design, 


thread. 

The  interesting  variation  in  the 
background  of  the  cushion  cover 
design  on  page  29  is  given  by  catch- 
ing two  bars  together  in  the  middle. 
Notice  too,  in  this  handsome  piece 
of  work,  the  various  methods  thai 
have  been  employed  for  filling  in  the 
leaves,  hardly  any  two  being  alike. 


An  effective  little  square  made  by 
darning   filet  crochet- 


Innishmacsaint  Lace. 


INNISHMACSAINT  LACE. 

When  Queen  Alexandra  last  visited 
Ireland,  the  women  of  that  country, 
who  always  had  a  respectful  liking 
for  her,  were  puzzling  over  what 
offering  they  could  make  that  would 
express  in  any  suitable  manner  their 
regard  and  esteem,  and  at  the  same 
time  be  acceptable,  they  thought  of 
this  Innishmacsaiut  lace,  and  unani- 
mously agreed  upon  it.  It  is  tne 
most  precious  of  all  the  Irish  laces, 
and  is  very  like  the  rare  old  Venetian 
Point.  A  length  of  this  was  made 
and  tied  around  a  bouquet  of  choice 
flowers,  which  was  presented  to  Her 
Majesty.  It  is  said  that  she  appre- 
ciated the  beauty  of  the  offering  very 
much,  as  well  as  the  manner  in  which 
it  was  made. 

The  lace  is  made  in  the  finest  of 
linen  thread  in  the  natural  colour, 
and  though  so  very  fine  is  not  at  all 
difficult  to  make,  as  the  stitches  used 
are  only  variations  of  the  well-known 
buttonhole  stitch,  but  the  very  fine 
stitchery  required  is  somewhat  trying 
to  the  eyes  if  the  worker  be  not 
blessed  with  very  keen  sight ;  there- 
fore only  a  small  piece  should  be 
worked  at  a  time,  and  there  is  no 
reason  why  anyone  who  can  sew  very 


neatly  should  not  make  a  few  motifs 
in  this  charming  lace,  if  only  for  the 
purpose  of  learning  how  to  make  it. 
An  idea  of  the  costliness  of  this 
needle  point  may  be  formed  from  the 
fact  that  lace,  only  3  inches  deep, 
will  cost  from  52/-  a  yard  upwards 
when  of  the  best  quality. 

The  piece  of  lace  illustrated  was 
worked  with  No.  100  Irish  Lace 
Thread,  linen,  in  the  natural  colour, 
that  is  unbleached,  a  very  coarse  soft 
linen  thread  was  employed  for  the 
"  high  relief  "  edges  and  rings,  a  very 
particular  feature  of  this  class  of  lace. 
The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  prepare  the 
design,  but  these  can  be  had  already 
made  from  the  fancy-work  depots. 
They  are  usually  composed  of  the 
design  traced  on  green  linen  or  glazed 
calico  in  heavy  black  lines,  and  these 
are  best,  as  the  green  background 
makes  the  stitching  less  trying  and 
more  distinct.  If  from  any  reason 
one  of  these  is  not  obtainable  then 
the  design  must  be  drawn  on  a  piece 
of  paper  and  transferred  to  the  glazed 
calico,  or  it  can  be  worked  on  a  small 
piece  of  tough  paper  if  only  a  single 
motif  be  required. 

Tack  the  paper  securely  to  a  piece 


33 


C.N.      C 


Innishmacsaint 
Lace. 

of  coarse  linen,  then  take  5  or  6 
strands  of  the  linen  thread  and  fold 
them  into  a  cord  long  enough  to 
cover  the  outlines  of  the  design. 
Beginning  at  the  end  of  a  stem  or 
leaf,  lay  this  cord  along  the  outline 
and  fasten  over  it  with  a  st  across  the 
cord,  bring  the  needle  up  from  under- 
neath beside  the  cord  somewhat  less 
than  ^g -inch  from  the  last  st,  insert 
the  needle  from  the  other  side  of  the 
cord  through  the  same 
hole  and  pull  the 
thread,  nottoo  tightly, 
but  so  as  to  keep  the 
outlining  even,  then 
repeat  yiis  st  until 
the  entire  outline  has 
been  covered.  All  the 
lines,  including  the 
little  rings,  must  be 
outlined  with  this 
cord.  You  then 
proceed  to  fill  in  the  centres  with  the 
various  kinds  of  buttonhole  st,  taking 
great  care  to  keep  the  work  as  clean 
as  possible.  For  this  purpose  only 
the  part  in  actual  use  should  be  left 
uncovered  ;  the  other  portion  should 
have  a  piece  of  white  paper  tacked 
over  it,  and  if  the  strip  be  long  it 
must  be  folded  and  pinned  into  a 


WORKING  THE  LACK  STITCH. 


roll,  then  on  the  working  portion  the 
fingers  should  touch  it  as  little  as 
possible  ;  a  scrap  of  tissue  paper 
wound  round  the  thumb  of  the  left 
hand  and  tightly  twisted  at  the  top  to 
keep  it  secure  is  the  readiest  way  to 
prevent  soiling  from  that  useful 
member  which  is  the  finger  that 
conies  most  often  into  contact  with 
it.  The  sts  must  always  end  at  a 
traced  line;  there  can  be  no  joining 
in  the  centre  or  any 
other  part,  and  when 
the  thread  gets  too 
short  it  must  be  run 
2  or  3  times  into  the 
tracing  line  to  secure 
it,  without  making 
the  tracing  too  thick  ; 
then  cut  away,  join 
a  new  t  h  r  e  a  d  b  y 
fastening  to  the 
outline  with  a  couple 
of  tight  sts.  A  hint  of  great  use  to  a 
worker  is  to  always  work  with  the 
point  of  the  needle  turned  from  the 
worker  ;  the  sts  are  more  uniform 
when  this  method  is  adopted. 

When  all  the  spaces  are  filled, 
the  edges,  except  those  in  "  high 
relief,"  are  worked  over  in  a  close 
buttonhole  st,  with  the  picots  if 


/\/\AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA/\ 


AM  OUTLINK  OF  THE   PATTEUN 


34 


necessary.  In  the  sample  illustrated 
there  are  no  picots  on  the  thin 
buttonholed  edges,  but  they  are 
plentiful  on  those  in  relief.  For  the 
edges  in  high  relief,  }TOU  take  a  very 
coarse  linen  thread  of  the  same  colour, 
or  fold  the  outlining  cord  in  three  as 
a  substitute,  and  work  the  button- 
hole sts  over  this  into  the  edge  of  the 
leaf.  The  large  rings  are  also  worked 
over  this  thick  padding  and  the  little 
loops  with  picots  formed  while  work- 
ing the  buttonhole  sts.  It  will  be 
more  convenient  to  work  the  small 
rings  separately,  and  then  sew  them 
in  place. 

To  Work  the  Buttonhole  Stitch. 

Commence  at  the  right  side  of  a 
line  and  work  a  row  evenly  and 
closely  to  the  opposite  side,  make  a  st 
into  the  outlining  cord  and  bring 
the  thread  back  across  the  top  of  the 
sts  to  the  point  where  you  began  the 
row,  make  a  st  into  the  outlining 
cord  here,  then  work  back  over  this 
thread  into  the  sts.  of  the  1st  row, 
taking  care  to  go  into  every  st,  and 
where  there  is  a  diamond,  stripe,  or 
other  figure  in  little  openwork  holes, 
you  pass  over  2  or  3  sts  by  stretching 
the  thread  across  the  thread  already 
there  and  even  with  it,  then  when 
coming  back  work  the  same  number 
of  sts  over  the  2  threads  as  were 
missed  in  the  previous  row. 

To  make  a  Picot. 

At  the  point  where  }rou  require  the 
picot  to  be  you  insert  a  pin  through 
the  linen,  pass  the  thread  once 
around  this  phi'  to  form  a  tiny  up- 
standing loop,  make  a  st  on  the  edge, 


A   Beautiful 
Design. 

then  put  a  couple  of  sts  around  the 
stem  of  the  loop  and  continue  along 
the  edge  to  the  next  picot,  and  so  on. 

The  little  loops  with  picots  are 
made  by  turning  the  thread  back  and 
forming  a  loop  by  making  a  tight 
st  into  the  edge  about  10  sts  to  the 
right  :  form  another  loop  over  this 
and  fasten  to  the  left,  then  bring  the 
thread  back  to  the  right  again  and 
fasten  into  the  1st  st,  thus  getting  3 
threads  to  work  over. 

The  bars  that  connect  the  different 
portions  of-  the  design  are  all  worked 
over  a  single  thread,  and  there  are 
single  or  double  loops  with  picots 
worked  on  the  centre  of  all  the 
longer  bars. 

The  top  edge  is  worked  before  the 
filling  of  the  bars,  of  course  ;  the  2 
horizontal  lines  are  outlined  with  the 
thick  thread,  then  buttonholed  and 
the  space  between  filled  with  diagonal 
bars.  In  the  lower  edge  the  horizontal 
line  is  also  of  the  coarse  thread,  and 
the  loops  and  picots  are  formed  while 
working  the  buttonholing  over  the 
line. 

The  lace  is  removed  from  the 
design  by  cutting  the  threads  on  the 
back  of  the  design. 

When  the  stitchery  is  finished, 
place  the  lace  between  folds  of  linen 
wrung  out  from  hot  water,  press  with 
a  hot  iron  until  the  linen  is  nearly 
dry,  only  on  the  wrong  side  of  the 
lace.  Remove  the  linen  from  under 
the  lace,  and  keep  pressing  over  the 
upper  piece  until  the  lace  is  quite 
dry.  The  front  of  the  lace  should 
show  out  in  high  relief  and  the  lace 
be  quite  crisp  and  fresh. 


35 


Reticella  Lace  Squares. 


The  band 
round  the 
central  figure 
has  the 
buttonholes 
spaced. 


Here  the 
P  i  c  o  t  s  on 
t  h  e  Corded 
Bars  give  a 
light  effect. 


This  work  is  made  with  a  rather 
coarse  make  of  linen  thread,  which 
gives  a  heavy,  rich  effect,  and  is  most 
suitable  for  inserting  in  bed,  table 
linen,  etc. 

The  design  should  first  be  traced 
on  moleskine  or  architect's  dn  -ving 
paper.  The  principal  lines  of  tracing 
are  now  outlined  with  two  strands  of 
the  thread,  which  are  couched  down 


at  intervals  with  needle  and  ordinary 
sewing  cotton .  This  serves  as  founda- 
tion for  the  work  and  is  most 
important. 

Buttonhole  stitch  is  chiefly  em- 
ployed for  this  work.  The  "  brides 
or  barrettes  "  are  made  by  stretching 
the  thread  across  space  three  times, 
and  buttonholing. 

The    thicker    parts    of    the    workr 


A   Star 
Pattern. 
The  triangles 
are  composed 
of  spaced 
buttonholes. 


The  five 
central  bars 
crossing  in 
the  centre 
are  in  Bind- 
ing Stitch. 


36 


Patterns  for 
Inlet. 


Another 
Star  Design, 
with  the 
alternate 
points  alike 
only. 


Notice  the 
pretty  finish- 
ing    of    the 
corners  in 

this  work. 


principally  the  small  triangles,  are 
worked  as  follows  : — 1  row  of  button- 
hole stitch  over  outline  thread,  throw 
thread  across  from  right  to  left,  pass 
needle  under  1st  buttonhole  stitch, 
work  as  before  with  buttonhole  stitch 
into  each  stitch  of  former  row  and 
over  thread. 

For  the  parts .  where  a  lighter 
effect  is  required  the  1st  row  of 
buttonhole  stitches  instead  of  being 
close  together  are  slightly  spaced  ;  in 


the  following  row  a  stitch  is  placed 
between  each,  and  in  the  next  rows 
alternately. 

In  some  parts  a  corded  effect  is 
obtained  by  simply  pressing  thread 
closely  under  outline  thread  and 
drawing  up  tightly. 

When  the  work  is  completed,  the 
couching  stitches  are  done  and  the 
square  taken  off  the  paper  and  firmly 
pressed  on  the  wrong  side  with  a  hot 


A   Bold 
Design,     the 
main  feflture 
being  a  Cross 
in  ail  Oval. 


Woven 

Wheels  form 

the  centre  oi 

all  these 

patterns. 


The  Story  of  Amager 
Embroidery. 


The  present  time  is 
the  Renaissance 
period  of  Handicrafts. 
Never  were  national 
home-industries  more 
fully  recognised  or 
held  in  highe-r  honour 
than  they  are  to-day. 
Needleworkers  of  the 
highest  rank  are  stud- 


modern  times  at  their 
disposal ;  aided  and 
inspired,  too,  by  the 
designers  of  high 
standard  who  have 
made  such  a  thorough 
study  of  the  "Art  of 
national  industry," 
and  who  have  brought 
their  wider  experience 


The  simplicity  of 
the  stitches  is  here 
shown.  The  charm 
of  the  work  lies  in 
the  colouring.  ' 


O; 


iously  examining  old  stitches  and  deft- 
ly reproducing  them  with  the  improved 
implements  and  various  materials  of 


and  their  highly  cultured  taste 
to  bear  on  the  subject  and 
thus  brought  it  to  a  completion 


AN  ENLARGED  SECTION   OF  THE   CENTREPIECE. 


38 


Circular 
Patterns. 


—the    goal    of    its    initiators'     aim. 

Every  kind  of  national  industry  has 
its  romance,  its  own  record  of  steady 
development,  and  its  own  distinct 
characteristics,  which  account  for  its 
charm. 

One  of  the  most  charming  of  old 
national  industries  recently  brought, 
to  light  and  recognition  is  Amager- 
work,  so  called  from  the  island 
of   Amager,  just  outside  the 
city  of  Copenhagen.     It 
portraysthe  products 
of  the  traditional 
occupation 
of    the 


tinually  occurring,  bespeaks  a  surpris- 
ing understanding  of  the  inherent 
relations  of  colours.  The  clusters, 
wreaths,  and  "patches"  of  flowers, 
all  copied  "full  face  "  and  seldom  with 
any  stalks,  constitute  the  designs  of 
Amager- work.  The  endless  variety  of 
colours,  achieved  by  means  of  plant- 
dyes,  and  arranged  in  exquisite  effect, 
are  its  distinctive  charm. 

In  addition  to  the  technically 
interesting  type  of  design, 
exquisite  studies  in 
tone    and    har- 
rn  o  n  y    of 
colours, 


inhabi- 
tants of  thai 

island     in 

quaintly  pictorial 

manner.  Their  flowers, 

shrubs,  and  herbs    were 

their    models,     as    well 

as  the  medium  through  which 
they  obtained  their  lovely  mellow 
tints.  The  subtle  gradations  of  shades 
found  in  old  Amager  colours  speaks 
of  an  inborn  aesthetic  instinct,  and 
the  prodigality  in  design,  in  which 
new  juxtapositions  of  colour  are  con- 


A  BEAUTIFUL  CENTREPIECE. 

From  a  Copyright  Design  by  Mr.  Chr. 
Permin,  of  Copenhagen. 


there   is 
something 
essentially 
Dutch   in   the   char- 
acter   of     Amager-work 
(though   its  revival  and 
present  form  is  entirely 
due  to  the  Danes).     And  no  wonder! 
for  the  Amager  colony  was  imported 
from    Holland.      King   Christian   II. 
married  a  Dutch  princess  in  1515,  and 
it    was    undoubtedly  owing    to    her 
influence  that  he,   in   the   following 
year,  imported  some  30  Dutch  families 


39 


A  D'OILY  IN   SHADES 
YELLOW,   BLACK 


Amager 
Embroidery. 

on  account  of  the  fame  of  that  nation 

as  gardeners  and  dairy-farmers.     He 

gave  them  the  fertile  island  of  Amager 

as  a  settlement, 

and  the  tax  he 

levied  on  them 

consisted   of 

dairy    produce, 

vegetables,  and 

herbs    for    the 

royal  household 

and  retinue. 

From  t  hat 
day  till  now  has 
the  Aniager 
people's  fame 
as  gardeners 
maintained  its 
supremacy. 
And  it  is  one  of 
the  most  pictur- 
esque sights  of 
Copenhagen — and  one  that  no  visitor 
should  miss — to  see  the  vegetable  and 
flower-market  or  "Amager-torv"  in 
the  city  of  Copenhagen,  the  Amager 
wives  in  their  quaint  dresses,  and  the 
stalls  overflowing  with  what  truly 
look  like  prize  vegetables  and  flowers. 

They  have  preserved  their  Dutch 
type,  and  many  of  them  wear  the 
national  dress — maybe  somewhat 
modified  since  1516.  But  they  are 
undoubtedly  strong  and  independent 
as  a  clan,  though  loyal  to  the  core  to 
the  adopted  land  of  their  forefathers. 
It  was  these  settlers  who  initiated  the 
Amager- work. 

It  has  been  said  that  the  hall-mark 
of  decorative  art,  as  distinct  from 
merely  pleasing  ornamentation,  is  the 
former's  appeal  to  one's  emotions  and 
intellect  through  the  medium  of  one's 
senses;  and  national  industries  are 
said  to  approach  the  rank  and  standard 
of  art  in  proportion  as  they  reveal  the 


OF   RED,   BLUE, 
AND  WHITE. 


soul  of  the  people.  Few  national 
industries  appeal,  to  my  mind,  more 
directly  to  one's  emotions  than 
Amager  -work '. 
The  rich,  ripe 
tints  of  the 
thriving  cot- 
tage-blossoms, 
arranged  in 
prettily  contras- 
ting colours, 
the  bright , 
plentiful  blos- 
soms, tell  of  cot- 
tage-gardens, of 
love  for  Nature, 
and  of  some- 
thing more  be- 
sides. The  very 
mode  and  man- 
nerinwhichthe 
flowers  are  used 

as  models  for  their  embroideries,  and 
the  amplitude  of  their  embroidered 
works,  tell  a  romance  of  a  wish  to 
please  someone  with  a  gift,  to  the 
beautifying  of  which  gift  the  beloved 
flowers  must  be  sacrificed.  They  are 
always  most  becomingly  arranged  and 
then  "copied"  with  many  stitches  and 
with  much  and  careful  choosing  of 
colours.  Such  a  piece  of  stitchery  is 
pervaded  with  folk-lore  and  radiates 
romance. 

The  modern  Amager-work  owes  its 
revival  and  justly-earned  reputation 
to  Mr.  Chr.  Permin,  in  Copenhagen. 
He-  has  made  a  thorough  search  for 
authentic  models  in  the  shape  of 
Amager  aprons,  cloths  and  cushions, 
etc.,  and,  with  his  staff  of  able  workers 
and  designers,  has  not  only  revived 
the  old  industry,  but  made  it  to  meet 
modern  requirements.  And  he  him- 
self is  a  past-master  in  colour-schemes. 
The  work  is  most  fascinating,  and, 


40 


A  Hardanger 
Trimming. 


as  the  stitch  is  the  same  as  used  in 
plain  embroidery,  it  is  easy.  The 
variety  of  colours  makes  it  clear  for 
the  eyes  as  well.  Everything  hinges 


upon  a  correctly  poised  design  and 
the  real  Amager  colours.  Last,  but 
not  least,  Amager-work  is  most  applic- 
able and  distinctly  decorative. 


Hardanger    Blouse    Trimming. 


This  pattern  can  be  easily  copied  as 
it  contains  only  the  simplest  of  Har- 
danger stitches.  The  material  used  is 
white  Hardanger  linen.  The  outlines 
and  darning  are  worked  in  "  Bright- 
eye"  weaving,  lace  stitch  and  crochet 
in  "Gem  Brighteye." 

Counting  the 
Threads. 

It  makes  the  counting  easier  to  run 
&  piece  of  cotton  over  and  under  4 
threads  of  the  linen  for  the  size 
required.  This  also  serves  as  a  test 
of  the  accuracy  of  the  work ;  a  thread 
is  so  easily  missed  and  then  the  out- 
lines have  to  be  done  again. 

Darning, 

After  the  outlines  of  the  pattern  are 
finished,  run  a  thread  under  and  over 


2  threads  across  the  linen  between, 
miss  2  threads  and  repeat,  starting  the 
thread  over  this  time.  The  satin  stitch 
around  is  worked  over  4  threads. 

Lace 
Stitch. 

The  lace  stitch  is  done,  when  the  4 
sides  are  finished,  by  working  a  but- 
tonhole stitch  into  the  4  corners; 
then  overcast  each  stitch,  pulling  the 
thread  rather  tightly. 

Crochet 
Edge. 

Turn  the  linen  in,  leaving  2  threads 
beyond  the  satin  stitch,  over  this  work 
d  c,  making  the  loops  long  enough  to 
cover  the  linen  edge.  6  d  c,  Sch.slst 
back  into  4th  stitch,  into  loop  work 
5  dc,  1  picot,  5  dc. 


A  Brussels  Braid  Lace  Collar 


This  most  effective-looking  lace  is 
quite  simple  to  make,  and  the  work  is 
very  quickly  executed.  The  design 
shown  is  from  Mr.  William  Barnard, 
126,  Edgware  Road,  London,  W.,and 
he  is  able  to  supply  all  the  materials. 

A  fine  Brussels  net  and  the  two 
varieties  of  lace  braid  shown  will  be 
needed  to  make  the  collar,  also  lace 
thread  for  filling-in  purposes. 

First  tack  the  Brussels  net  over  the 
design,  and  then  place  the  fancy  braid 
round  the  edge  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration, whipping  the  inner  side  of 
each  curve.  Arrange  the  straight  braid 
where  required  and  fasten  securely 


with  a  tiny  hemming  stitch.  Then 
fill  in  the  twisted  bars  where  shown. 

The  small  leaves  are  made  by  cutting 
the  ovals  of  the  fancy  braid  apart,  and 
arranging  them  as  the  design  indi- 
cates. 

The  straight  braid  is  used  for  the 
flowers,  and  is  arranged  to  form  petals, 
the  centres  of  which  are  filled  in  with 
cross  bars.  Any  of  the  various  lace 
stitches  can  be  used  for  filling  in  the 
design. 

After  the  work  is  completed  remove 
it  from  the  pattern,  cutting  away  the 
surplus  muslin,  and  press  carefully 
with  a  warm  iron. 


A  CORKER  OF  THE  COI/LAB. 


42 


Carrickmacross  Lace. 


Carrick- 
macross 
lace,  as 
its  name 
denotes, 
is  especi- 
ally an 
Irish  lace. 
It  has 
known 
in  a  n  y 
v  i  c  i  s  s  i- 
tudes,  but 
has  sur- 
v  i  v  e  d 
them,  and  is  even 
more  popular  to- 


Showing  how  the  couching  is  done,  after  net  and 
muslin  are  tacked  over  the  design. 


neatness, 
make 
hand- 
some  and 
valuable 
lace. 

Materials 
required. 

These  are 
few,     but 
should  be 
of     the 
best 
quality. 
They   are 
Carrickmacross 
muslin,    white    or 


Some  of  the  Lace  S-titches 
that  can  be  used. 


FLOWERETS 
DESIGN. 

day  than  ever.  This 
lace  is  exceedingly 
beautiful,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  so  simple 
of  execution  that 
those  who  are  not 
great  workers  can, 
by  a  little  care  and 


DOTS  AND  RUNNING 
STITCHES. 

cream  ;  Brussels  net, 
square  mesh,  white 
or  cream  ;  lace  scis- 
sors, with  bulb  on 
one  point ;  needles, 
sizes  10  and  12  ; 
design;  Carrick- 
macross cotton, 


A  Section  of 

a  Carrickmacross 

Lace  Collar. 


43 


The  top 
illustration 
shows  how  the 
work  is  started. 


Carrickmacross 
Lace. 


white  or  cream,  60,  80,  150,  200. 
To  commence  the  work,  first  lay 
the  net  on  the  design,  and  then  the 
muslin,  tacking  through  all  these 
round  and  across,  and  then  very  care- 
fully round  the  design,  avoiding  the 
actual  lines  of  the  pattern.  This 
tacking  is  very  essential,  as  it  greatly 
improves  the  finish  of  the  lace. 

Working  the 
Design. 

The  worker  must  next  find  on  her 
design  a  pattern  where  she  can  com- 
mence to  work  that  will  follow  on  as 
far  as  possible  without  breaking  the 


cord,  the  60  and  150  cotton  work  well 
together,  or  the  80  and  200.  The 
coarser  thread  is  for  the  top  cord,  the 
finer  for  the  sewing  over.  Commence 
by  putting  down  a  long  thread,  and 
then  with  the  finer  thread  sew  the 
coarse  thread  with  small  slanting 
whipping-stitches  to  both  muslin  and 
net.  This  is  called  "  couching." 

Avoid  cutting  the  outlining  thread 
as  much  as  possible  by  turning  back 
and  sewing  the  two  threads  together  if 
necessary.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the 
thread  fs  usually  turned  into  a  picot 
at  the  edges.  This  is  done  by  turning 


A.  ROBESPrEBBE  COLLA.B. 


For  a  Scarf 
End. 


THE  FINISHED    WOHK  IS 
VERY  EFFECTIVE. 

a  loop  on  the  thread,  and  securing  it 
in  place  with  a  couple  of  neat  stitches 
in  the  centre. 

After  a  sufficiently  long  piece  is 
worked,  then  cut  out.  This,  of  course, 
must  be  very  carefully  done,  as  the 
muslin  must  be  cut  away  from  the 
outside,  design,  so  as  not  to  cut  the 
net  underneath .  First  pick  up  a  little 
pieceof  muslin,  and  then  cut  round  the 
pattern,  keeping  tl  e  b  unt  side  of  the 
scissors  against  the  net.  The  spaces 
can  then  be  filled  in  with  fancy 
stitches.  Some  of  these  are  here  illus- 
trated. After  the  work  is  finished, 
take  off  the  pattern  and  press  with  a 
warm  iron,  putting  some  thin  material 
between  the  iron  and  the  work. 

The  designs  for  collars,  etc.,  can, 
of  course,  be  bought  on  glazed  linen 
or  ready  traced  on  Carricktnacross 


muslin.  Or  if  you  prefer  to  use  your 
own  design,  you  should  copy  it  on  a 
piece  of  stiff  white  paper,  such,  as 
drawing  paper.  Then  go  over  it  with 
pen  and  ink,  rather  heavily,  and 
remove  all  trace  of  lead  pencil  care- 
fully by  rubbing  with  dry  bread 
crumbs. 
Where  to  get  Materials. 

This  work  makes  beautiful  col- 
lars, cuffs,  scarf  ends,  fans,  d'oilies, 
handkerchiefs,  lace,  etc.,  and  one  of 
the  illustrations  shows  a  corner  of  a 
beautiful  "Robespierre"  collar. 

You  can  get  this  design,  also  the 
pattern  of  lace  illustrated  and  all  the 
requisites  for  this  work,  from  Mr. 
William  Barnard,  126,  Bdgware  Road, 
London,  W.;  also  a  large  number  of 
other  designs  for  this  handsome  form 
of  work. 


45 


Bulgarian  Embroidery. 


There     is     a     great     demand     for 
Bulgarian  embroidery  at  present,  for 
ornamenting  collars,  trimming  coats 
and  bodices,  as  well  as  for  trimming 
hats.       The    Bulgarian    women    are 
famous    for    the    embroideries    with 
which  they  adorn  their  clothes  and 
household  napery.      This  embroidery 
is  very  easily  made  on 
coarse     linen     of     an 
open  texture,  such  as 
is  at  present  used    to 
form   collars   to    wear 
with  the   coat    01 
blouse. 

An}-  design  may  be 
'copied  and  the  outline 
worked  with  stem 
stitch,  as  this  must 
resemble  a  cord  as 
closely  as  possible, 
then  the  centre  may  be  A  VANDYKE  PATTERN 


There  is  generally  a  fancy  stitch 
used  as  an  edging  for  insertion  strips. 
In'  the  samples  shown,  the  first  .is 
worked  in  the  fashionable  shades  of 
ecru  and  white  on  coarse  linen,  fol- 
lowing the  lines  in  the  material  the 
design  is  outlined  with  stem  stitch 
over  four  threads,  there  are  three 


n 


A  DIAMOND  INSERTION  IN  THREE   SHADES. 

filled  in  with  any  stitch  with  which 
you  are  familiar,  such  as  flat  stitch, 
stroke  stitch,  cross  stitch,  fishbone 
stitch,  herring-boning,  etc.  The  out- 
line only  may  be  done,  according  to 
the  character  of  the  design,  or  a  por- 
tion of  it  filled,  orentirely  worked  over. 


IN  ECRU  AND  WHITE. 

rows  in  each  line,  the 
two  outside  being  in 
ecru  and  the  centre 
white. 

The  edging  is  simply 
a  straight  stitch  over 
two  threads,  leaving 
two  between  the 
stitches,  then  a  row  of 
square  back  stitch 
worked  thus  : — Make 
a  horizontal  back 
stitch  over  two 
threads,  cross  over 
two  threads  above 
these  two  and  make 
another  back  stitch,  this  gives  two 
sides  of  a  square,  make  a  back  stitch 
over  next  two  threads  after  the  first, 
then  another  after  the  second  and  so 
on,  working  these  two  rows  to  the  end, 
then  return  and  work  the  other  two 
sides  of  the  square  in  the  same  way. 


The  second  sample  is  also  worked 
in  stem  stitch  in  three  shades,  green, 
tan,  and  white.  The  tan  color  is 
worked  first  in  a  simple  design  of 
diamond  shape,  inside  this  there  are 
three  rows  of  white,  all  worked  in  the 
same  way,  then  one  of  green,  leaving 
the  centre  unworked.  Outside  the 
tan  row  there  is  one  of  white,  then 
another  of  green.  In  the  half-diamond 
space  there  is  a  vacant  row  after  the 
green  followed  by  a  small  green  angle. 
A  row  of  square  back  stitch  finishes 
each  edge. 

This  embroidery  will  be  very 
fashionable  for  trimming  linen  cos- 
tumes the  coming  summer,  and  as 
the  machine-made  kind  cannot  at  all 
equal  that  made  by  hand,  there  is  an 
opportunity  for  even-one  to  make 
her  own  trimming  in  this  lovely, 
fancy-work.  The  chief  beauty  of  it 
lies  in  an  artistic  blending  of  color, 
vivid  tones  of  purple,  green  and  crim- 
son, are  blended  with  blue  very 
effectually  by  separating  the  shades 
with  a  row  of  black.  Ecru  and  all 
yellow  shades  are  combined  with 


For  Costume 
Trimmings. 

white  for  the  quieter  kinds,  and  for 
evening  wear,  gold  and  silver  threads 
are  much  used,  combined  with  other 
colors  which  must  match  or  contrast 
with  the  dress  worn. 

For  trimming  the  collar  and  cuffs 
of  a  tweed  costume  or  other  material 
in  which  the  threads  cannot  be 
counted,  the  design  must  be  trans- 
ferred to  the  material.  It  is  then  an 
easy  matter  to  work  the  outline  with 
regular  stitches  and  fill  in  the  design 
as  already  explained.  For  this  pur- 
pose too,  the  outline  ma}7  be  made  of 
fine  braid  and  then  the  colored  thread 
fills  in  the  rest  of  the  design. 

Vegetable  silk  or  any  of  the  mer- 
cerised cottons  may  be  used,  as  well 
as  fine  woollen  thread  and  ordinary 
embroidery  silk. 

For  washing  materials  Ardern's 
' '  Star  Sylko  ' '  is  very  suitable. 

Ribands  for  trimming  hats  are  easily 
worked  with  the  aid  of  a  good  transfer 
design.  Choose  a  detached  spray, 
and  keep  the  remainder  of  the  riband 
covered  while  working  each,  in  order 
to  avoid  soiling  the  work. 


A  Linen 
Cover 

for    a 
tea  cosy 
orna- 
mented 

with 
Bohe- 
mian 

Lace. 


The 

herring- 
b  o  n  e 
stitches 
in  the 
lace  com- 
bine well 
with 
drawn 
work. 


47 


Limerick  Tambour   Lace. 


Limerick  "tambour"  lace  is  suitable 
for  collars,  handkerchief  borders  and 
jabots,  as  well  as  for  trimming  evening 
dresses,  etc.  This  lace  is  very  easy  to 
make, as  it  is  composed  almost  entirely 
of  the  ordinary  crochet  chain  stitch 
worked  through  the  meshes  of  the  net. 
A  pattern  of  the  design  is  essential,  and 
this  may  be  drawn  on  a  sheet  of  white 
paper  with  pen  and  ink,  or  any  transfer 
design  can  be  employed,  provided  the 
motif  contains  continuous  lines.  The 
best  Brussels  net,  a  small  tambour 
frame,  a  fine  crochet-hook,  Manlove's 
No.  60  and  No.  100  Irish  L,ace  Thread, 
and  an  ordinary  fine  sewing-needle 
are  the  materials  required.  The  net 
is  tacked  carefully  over  the  design, 
then  with  the  finer  thread  the  design 
is  traced  by  running  the  stitches  in 
and  out  through  the  meshes  over  the 
lines  in  the  design,  going  over  the 
outline  only.  Trace  a  line  for  the 
edges  at  both  sides.  Remove  the  net 


A   very 
Handsome 
Handker- 
hief     Bor- 
der    which 
is  not  diffi- 
c  u  1  t    to 
make. 


from  the  design  by  cutting  the  threads 
on  the  back  of  the  paper,  pick  out  the 
loose  bits  of  thread,  and  arrange  the 
net  in  the  tambour  frame. 

With  a  crochet-hook  make  a  loop 
on  the  end  of  No.  60  thread  as  if  for 
a  crochet  chain,  withdraw  the  hook 
and  hold  this  loop  with  the  fingers  of 
the  left  hand  under  the  frame  up  to 
the  point  in  the  design  where  you 
wish  to  begin,  holding  the  tambour 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 
With  the  crochet-hook  in  the  right 
hand,  insert  it  down  through  the 
mesh  over  the  loop  and  draw  the  loop 
up  to  the  right  side,  insert  the  hook 
through  the  next  mesh  (over  the  lines 
throughout)  and  draw  up  a  loop  of  the 
thread,  pull  this  loop  through  the  loop 
on  the  hook,  insert  the  hook  through 
the  next  mesh  and  draw  up  a  loop, 
•then  pull  this  through  the  loop  on 
the  needle,  and  so  on. 

This  is  the  entire  stitch,  and  only 
requires  a  very  little  practice  to  make 
one  proficient.     Having  gone  over  the 
outlines,  the  centres  of  the  leaves  and 
petals  are  filled  in  with  a  couple  of 
rows,  using  the  finer  thread,  or  the 
inside  may  be  filled  with  fancy  lace 
stitches.     Scrolls    are    usually   made 
solid,  that  is,   close  rows  of   the  ch 
stitch   are   worked   into   them.     The 
edges  are  then   worked  with  a  row, 
having  a  second   row   worked   right 
through  the  centre  of 
the   first,    the   net    is 
next   cut   away    from 
the   lower   edge,    and 
the    lace    placed     be- 
tween the  folds  of  a 
piece     of     damped 
calico,    press    with   a 
hot   iron  until   the 
calico  be  dry,  remove 


48 


Pretty 
Laces. 


A  SIMPLE   LACE   PATTERN 


the  calico,  and 
finish  off  on 
the  back  of  the 
lace  itself, 
when  it  is 
completed. 

This  Limerick 
Tambour  Lace 
is  often  finished 
with  a  row  of 
pearl  edging 
sold  for  the 
purpose.  This 
is  top-sewn  to 
the  edge,  using  the  finer  thread. 

To  make  the  edges  of  the  lace  more 
durable  it  is  usual  to  work  a  double 
row  of  ch  around  the  edges,  then  cut 
away  the  net  from  outside  the  design, 
allowing  a  margin  of  two  rows  of 
meshes  outside  the  outer  line  ;  these 

Limerick    ' 

Limerick  "  Run  "  Lace  is  one  of  the 
most  expensive  of  the  Irish  laces. 
Exquisitely  dainty  in  appearance  and 
extremely  fine  in  texture  it  requires 
the  very  best  and  finest  of  net  made 
specially  for  the  purpose.  The  design 
is  placed  under  the  net  and  the  out- 
line gone  over  with  running  stitch 
through  the  meshes.  For  this  pur- 
pose very  fine  thread,  Limerick  Lace 
Thread  No.  250  is  used  doubled.  The 
single  thread  is  employed  for  darning 
the  meshes  within  the  design,  running 
the  threads  through  the  %S$ffi&$ 

meshes  first  in  one  direc- 
tion and  then  across.  Any 
lace  stitch  may  be  used 
for  the  filling,  and  as  a 
general  rule  the  back- 
ground is  left  clear.  A 
fine  pearl  edging  sold 
for  the  purpose  is  usually 
sewn  round  the  edges  of 


rows  are  twirled  under  when  sewing 
on  the  edging.  For  the  handkerchief 
border,  the  inner  edge  is  top-sewn 
to  the  lawn  centre,  allowing  the  two 
rows  of  margin,  and  twirling  these 
when  sewing  on  the  wrong  side  to  the 
hemstitching. 

Run "    Lace. 

this  lace  to  finish  it.  The  pretty 
design  illustrated  would  be  suit- 
able for 
a  hand- 
kerchief 
border, 
or  would 
make  a 
delight- 
ful cor- 
ner for  a 
square 

collar.          * 
B 

^^^^^K^i^i^V^ 

:>>>;•>;•;•;•> 


;;iiPSv££.#£ 


••*''-* 


X<<<*Xw>>>>^^ 

^X»>X^>vvw£^^ 


A  PRETTY  CORNER  DESIGN. 

49 


C.N.      D. 


My  Workbox, 


BY  THE  EDITOR. 


My  interest  in  work- 
boxes  dates    back    to 
the  time  when  I  first 
read   The  Wide    Wide 
World,   and  that  was 
^well,  it  was  the  first 
long  story'  book  that 
I    possessed    for     my 
very  own  !     Up 
to  that  time,  my 
personal  library 
had     consisted 
of  children's 
•coloured    toy 
hooks,     fairy 
tales   and    the 
like.    The  ad- 
dition  of    The 
Wide     Wide 

World  (with  roses  and  forget-me-nots 
on  the  cover)  marked  a  distinct  epoch 
in  my  life  ! 

It  was  after  I  had  read  that  enthral- 
ling chapter,  where  Ellen  goes  to 
the  store  with  her  mother  and  buys 
delightful  things,  and  a  work- 
box  is  among  the  parcels  sent 
home,  that  I  set  to  and  tidied 
up  the  small  wooden  box  (and 
a  very  inferior  bit  of  furniture 
I  felt  it  was,  too,  after  the 
delightful  affair  Mrs.  Mont- 


THE    WORK-BOX 


gomery  bought 
for  her  daugh- 
ter !)  thereby 
raising  great 
hopes  in  the 
feminine  portion 
of. my  older 
relatives.  They 
trusted  it  was  an 
indication  that  I 
was  going  to  turn 
over  a  new  leaf, 
and  be  more 
diligent  with  iny 
needle  ;  alas  !  it 
was  nothing  of 
the  sort.  As  a 
small  girl  I  detes- 
ted needlework, 

and  as  a  big  girl  I  was  vastly  superior 
to  everything  of  the  kind.  Plain 
needlework  I  felt  was  so  sordid  ;  and 
fancy  needlework  so  inane  and  futile ! 
When  I  was  in  my  early  teens  I 
was  quite  convinced  that  I  owed  it 
to  the  world  at  large,  to  say 
nothing  of  posterity,  to  devote 
my  intellect  to  far  weightier 
matters  and  deeper  matters 
than  anything  connected  with 
needlework  ;  so  you  can  see 
that  the  hopes  of  my  elders 


The  article  on  the  left  is  for  a  small  spool  of  silk  The  next  is  a  carved 
screw  for  holding  material  firmly  to  the  edge  of  a  table.  The  ^tre  article 
has  a  tape  and  measure  at  th3  top,  bees-wax  below  and  a  V™c™*™$  "J '  Jg 
base.  The  next  is  a  tape  meisure,  and  the  ivory  box  on  the  right  holds 
glove  buttons.  The  carving  on  the  ivory  in  each  case  is  very  fane. 

50 


A   Fancy  Holder  for  a  reel  of  cotton.     The  top  is 
mother-of-pearl.     The  Ivory  Mallet  is  a  pin-cushion. 


•were  but  short-lived,  The  only 
Treason  I  tidfed  up  my  old  work-box 
was  because  I  was  convinced  .that  that 
perfect  child, 
Ellen  Mont- 
gomery, al- 
ways kept  hers 
•scrupulously 
tidy  ;  and  as  I 
was  modelling 
myself  entire- 
ly on  her  lines, 
naturally  I  felt 
I  was  bound  to  pay  attention  to  every 
•small  detail. 


One  of  the  humours  of  life  as  we 
grow  older  and  leave  our  teens  behind, 
is  to  look  back  and  remember  what 
self-opinionated  little  im- 
portances we  were  at  about 
sixteen  !  How  fixed  were 
our  views  of  life  !  How 
we  knew  everything  !  How 
certain  we  were  that  our 
ideas  would  be  precisely  the 
•same  for  all  the  rest  of 
time!  And  how  original  and 
wonderful  we  considered 
those  ideas  of  ours  to  be! 
{and,  incidentally,  what  a  trial  most 
of  us  were  to  our  families  at  just 

about  that  age !) 

Still,  it's  a  merciful  thing  that  in 
the  majority  of  cases  we  gain  a  little 

wisdom  as  we  grow  older, 
and  learn  that  there  may, 

after  all,  be  some  worth 

in  the  things  we  scorned 

as  youngsters.     It's  a 

good  thing,  too,  that  our 

tastes  often  become  quite 

healthy  and-normal  as 

we  proceed    along    the 

""twenties."    It  was  so  in 


This  Crimson  Silk  Pin- 
cushion has  groups  of 
flowers  and  fruit  finely 
carved  in  ivory  on  each 
side. 


Why  it  was 
obtained. 

my  own  case,  I  believe  ;  for  it  was 
just  about  then  that  I  began  to 
develop  an  interest  in  needlework. 
It  came  to  me  as  a  sort  of  reaction 
after  too  much  mental  work,  and  the 
inevitable 
n  e  r  v  o  u  s 
breakdown 
that  finds 
out  most 
girls  wh  o 
are  imbued 
with  the 
notion  that  their  intellectual  attain- 
ments'are  of  vast  importance  to  the 
nation  ! 

And  after  the  breakdown,  when  I 
couldn't  bear  the  sight  of  books  or 
the  sound  of  music,  I  found  myself 
actually  doing  needlework,  and  liking 
it  too  ;  and  the  fascination 
of  it  grew  upon  me  very 
rapidly,  till  now — I  really 
don't  know  what  I  should 
do  if  I  hadn't  needlework 
to  fall  back  upon,  as  a 
recreation,  when  I  get  over- 
done with  the  wear  and  tear 
and  strain  of  work  in  our 
great  city. 

I  always  feel  sorry  for  the 
business  woman  who  hasn't  found 
out  what  a  charm  and  solace  there  is 
in  doing  sewing  or  crochet  work,  or 
knitting,  or  embroidery,  after  a  day 
spent  in  wrestling  with  the  stern 
commercial 
side  of  life. 
She  misses 
so  much. 

But  to  re- 
turn to  the 
subject  of 
work-boxes. 
By  the  time  I 
found  out  for 


A  round  Pin-cushion  with  Chinese  carving 

on  the  top.     The  small  barrel  is  a  tape 

measure. 

51 


The  Editor's 
Work-box. 

myself  what  a  vast  amount  of  pleasure 
can  be  produced  by  a  ball  of  crochet 
cotton  and  a  hook, 
my  old  work-box 
was  no  longer  in 
existence. 


A.  Wooden  Case  for  packets  of  needles, 
brown  ornamented  with  gilt. 


I  made  shift  with  a  work-basket  and 
similar  frauds,  till  at  last  it  was  borne 
in  upon  me  that  I  must  have  a  work- 
box,  and  a  very  comprehensive  one 
too.  I  had  all  sorts  of  oddments  in 
the  way  of  fittings,  and  I  got  tired  of 
rattling  them  about  in  an  incapable 
work-basket,  and 
diving  for  them  to 
the  bottom  of  a 
much-tangled -up 
work-bag. 

I  wandered  around 
the  shops,  but  the 
work-boxes  they 
showed  me  seemed  curiously  inade- 
quate in  every  particular — there  was 
no  room  for  anything  in  most  of 
them,  and  they  were  singularly  un- 
interesting as  a  whole  in  their 
appearance. 

Nothing  so  convinces 
you  that  you  want 
and  must  have  a  thing , 
as  the  fact  that  you 
can't  get  it !  and  by 
this  time,  all  ruy  spare 
moments  seemed  oc- 
cupied with  a  craving 
for  a  nice  work-box, 


Beeswax, 
mounted    with 
mother-of-pearl. 


A  mother-of-pearl  and  gilt 
thimble  holder. 


I  even  started  to  design  one  at  last, 
only  the  design  was  never  finished, 
because  I  could  not  make  up  my  mind 
as  to  the  exact  number  of  compart- 
ments I  should  require. 

Fortunately,  when  my  need  was 
becoming  most  acute,  someone  sent 
me  a  present  of  a  box,  that  not  only 
had  as  many  compartments  as  I  had 
longed  for,  but  ever  so  many  to  spare  ; 
moreover,  the  box  was  so  beautiful  in 
itself,  that  it  was,  and  still  is  a  con- 
stant joy  just  to  look  at  it. 

This  box  is  antique,  and  was 
evidently  made  in  the  Bast.  So  solid 
is  it,  that  it  is 
almost  as 
heavy  as  a  sew- 
ing machine 
to  lift;  but  it 
stands  always 
on  a  conven- 
ient side  table, 
so  its  weight 
does  not  worry 
me.  It  is 
inlaid  most 
exquisitely 
with  ivory, 
tortoise  shell, 
silver,  in  addition  to  light  and  dark 
wood  ;  the  workmanship  of  the  whole 
is  wonderful.  There  are  twenty-three 
roomy  compartments  in  the  top  tray, 
and  vast  space  below. 

At  last  I  had  a  re- 
spectable box  for  my 
many  oddments;  and 
it  was  not  long  before 
the  collection  grew  ; 
friends  contributed 
items;  relations  turned 
out  ancient  put-away 
work-boxes  and  found 
little  fittings  which 


This  ancient  little  Dutch 
Doll  is  an  Emery  Bag. 


52 


A  Needle-case  covered  with  blue,  green,  red, 
white  beads. 

they  sent  me.  And  in  a  very  little 
time  it  transpired  that  I  had  a  work- 
box  that  was  really  something  worth 
caring  for  and  cherishing.  The  hobby 
has  grown  till  now  my  work-box  stands 
for  all  sorts  of  pleasant  memories,  and 
I  can  see  myself  in  my  old  age  getting 
quite  garulous  over  it ! 


Now  for  the  contents.  There  are 
tiny  pin  cushions  of  various  kinds, 
round,  square 
and  heart 
shape,  some 
of  ivory  and 
silk,  with  the 
fi  n  e  s  t  of 
Chinese  car- 
ving on  the 
top.  A  carved 
ivory  box 
holds  small 
glove  buttons.  The  little  Brass  Bear- 
There  are  quaint  long  needle-cases, 
some  are  carved,  one  very  uncommon 
one  is  of  bone,  covered  with  a  fine 
network  of  beads,  these  hold  silver 
bodkins,  beautifully  engraved.  Tape 
measures  appear  in  various  forms  and 
unwind  themselves  either  from  a 
barrel,  or  by  turning  the  tail  of  a 
don-key,  from  the  top  of  a  kind  of 
pepper-box  lighthouse. 
This  last  is  a  noble  r 
ornament,  because,  in 
.addition  to  the  tape 
measure,  it  provides  a 
pin -cushion  at  its  base. 


and 


Its 

Contents. 

and  a  piece  of  wax  for  waxiiig 
your  thread,  half  way  up. 

There  are  quite  a  number  of 
ornamental  devices  for  holding 
bees-wax,  some  with  silver  ends, 
one  with  mother-of-pearl  out- 
side.    Emery-bags  also  prevail, 
one  taking  the  form  of  a  charming 
little  Dutch  woman  in  a  full  green 
silk  skirt.     This  is  well  over  60  years 
old. 

There  are  needle  books  with  various 


A  pair  of  Silver  Scissors- 
appropriate  mottoes,  such  as  "A  stitch 
in  time  saves  nine,"  a  little  wooden 
case  for  holding  packets  of  needles, 
one  or  two  carved  wooden  boxes  for 
hooks  and  eyes,  a  pearl  thimble  case, 
an  old-time  "  housewife,"  a  little  brass 
bear  with  a  head  that  lifts  up  and 
makes  room  for  darning  needles 
inside  him.  (By  the  way,  he  is 
evidently  the  twin  brother  to  the 
little  brass  bear  described  by  Mrs. 
Barclay  in  The  Rosary.) 

Perforated  cardboard  was  much 
patronized  by  our  grandmothers. 
Among  other  things,  I  have  an 
ornamental  case  for  holding  court 
plaster,  made  with  perforated  card- 
board worked  in  red  and  blue  silk.  On 
one  side  are  the  appropriate  words — 


2 


A  Carved  Needle-case. 


53 


The  Editor's 
Work-box. 


Go,  little  case, 
Thy  kind  assistance  lend, 

And  cure  when  cut 
The  finger  of  my  friend. 

while  on  the  back  is  worked — 
Oh  may  you  never,  never  feel 
A  deeper  wound  than  this  can  heal. 

Devices  for  holding  silk  when 
wound  were  more  popular  in  the  past, 
when  silk  was  dear  and  mercerised 
cottons  were  unknown .  My  work-box 
contains  both  wooden  and  mother-of- 
pearl  silk  winders,  and  a  little  carved 
silk  holder,  with  a  top  that  unscrews 
and  a  small  hole  at  the  side  for  the 
silk  strand  to  come  through. 

Gentlewomen  of  the  bye-gone  age 
evidently  indulged  in  note  books  as 
pretty  as  any  to  be  found  to-day.  I 
have  an  ancient  note-book  containing 
paper  and  an  ivory  tablet.  The  bind- 
ing outside  is  dark  leather  stamped 
very  ornately  with  gold.  In  the 
centre,  both  back  and  front,  is  let  in 
a  medallion  of  the  very  finest  Berlin 
wool  work  I  have  ever  seen.  Each 
medallion  shows  a  group  of  roses  and 
foliage  perfectly  executed.  Yet  is 
not  more  than  an  inch  and  a  half 
across.  The  book  inside  is  gorgeous 
with  rose-silk  pockets.  In  a  flowing 
Italian  hand,  that  so  well  matches 
the  period  of  the  book,  someone  has 
written  down  notes  of  a  sermon 
preached  at  Cheltenham,  but  no  date 
appears  (a  truly  feminine  omission  !) 
It  is  possible  that  the  same  lady  owned 
the  flat  silver  vinaigrette,  opening 
like  a  snuff  box,  that  I  keep  in  one 
compartment,  with  similar  relics.  It 
seems  to  suggest  a  hot  day  in  church. 
*  * 

Bait  the  work-box  is  practical  as 
well  as  ornamental.  It  is  a  matter  of 
puffed  up  pride  with  me  that  I  can 


invariably  supply  everybody's  needs 
in  the  way  of  haberdashery. 

There  are  linen  buttons  of  all  the 
orthodox  sizes;  glove  and  shoe 
buttons  galore ;  hooks  and  eyes,  white 
and  black,  of  all  gardes  ;  cottons  and 
silks  for  mending  every  imaginable 
shade  of  gloves,  with  lots  of  dress 
colours  thrown  in ;  white  embroidery 
threads  and  cotton  lie  in  orderly 
skeins,  from  size  1  onwards. 

Friends  try  to  catch  me  napping, 
and  come  to  ask  me  for  things  they 
think  I  shan't  have  in  stock,  but  I 
can  usually  supply  them.  White 
elastic  I  was  asked  for  recently,  also> 
narrow  linen  tape,  and  black  velvet 
binding  for  a  skirt-bottom,  I  pro- 
duced them  all,  trying  to  look  modest,, 
though  I  knew  the  inquirer  didn't 
really  need  them.  I  told  her  I  could 
also  supply  frilled  elastic  for  sus- 
penders if  she  required  any,  and 
small  brass  or  ivory  rings  for  sewing 
on  fancy  bags,  and  pins  with  any 
colour  heads  she  liked  to  name.  She 
retired,  duly  discomfited  I  trust. 

4  £ 

Now  my  reason  for  telling  about 
my  work-box  is  to  suggest  to  any 
readers  who  have  only  regarded  a 
work-box  as  an  uninteresting 
necessity  that  they  might  do  worse 
than  develop  a  "work-box  hobby." 
I  really  do  not  know  of  many  things 
that  are  more  fascinating  in  a  feminine 
way. 

There  is  something  very  pretty 
about  a  well-ordered  work-box,  to 
start  with,  and  that  in  itself  is  a  great 
advantage.  I  like  to  look  at  the 
rainbow-coloured  silks  and  cottons, 
at  the  lengths  of  pretty  narrow  ribbon, 
for  lingerie,  at  the  gay  little  pin- 
cushions, and  the  tiny  bags  made 
from  odd  bits  of  flowery  silk,  that  I 


54 


A  Darned 

Net  Square, 


•use  for  special  buttons. 
And  then  the  utility 
of   it  gives  an    added 
charm.     There  is  the 
same  sort  of  pleasure 
in  keeping  it  properly 
stocked    as    there    is 
in  looking   after   the 
st  ore-cupboard. 
Moreover,  this  is  not 
an  expensive    hobby 
One    can    add   a    few- 
reels    of     cotton    at 
it    does     not    amount 
much. 


A  Box  of  Ribbon  and  Perforated 

Cardboard,  ornamented   with    a 

•wreath    of    forget-me-nots    and 

roses. 


time,     and 
to    so     very 


The  fittings,  again, 
seem  to  collect  them- 
selves. Once  you  start, 
you  wi  11  be  surprised  to 
find  how  many  trifles 
turn  up  that    you 
pounce  upon  at  once, 
exclaiming,  "Thatwill 
just  do  for  my  work- 
box  !  "     Whether  the 
things  are  mordern  or 
antique  matters  little, 
so  longas  they  are  pretty  in  themselves 
and  can  be  turned  to  some  practical 
purpose. 


I*  ««»•, 
'»»  *» 
••r,  • 

»*•  •••* 

i«»-  •*• 

»  3SJ 

Kl 

*     *M* 

'*».  ••:; 
*•*    «> 
***     «•: 

i*i»»:; 
>  *«» 

»  *«» 

»•««»•. 


BSS^****'*  »S»*«»»   »• 

iss'^     is'sa1    " 

•f^iiii*  ••-      -B%%       *$ 


*»••••» 
.**  * 
•«*• 


: 

W^S^i^^^ 

«;%ss  *ss 

M»»  >        *«%      I  •«%»«•'-  .  •**••» :  *!» 

»   f«>$     '»*    so     <*«»  *ae.  !f*^S  '55 

i  %        '1*             *P  .-•••  :     •  •*«••'«  *         »:       -  -P    -•*•• 

.5'       '" 


«*• 


.*  *  «*»»  *  *    «i»  »i 

I  n.«.:*  I:."* ?s, 
ss  "• .;:»:.     •» 


-!« 


ir.    ."rr:«    .  -s.    «  .    « * 

mm.  *«»*»  -.        '    «MK,  «*»;     *»  *•     •»*#    **»     , 

as  :ar     as*.*    *s?    '^as 
sa&«*:r     s'Csa*    .    .sis.'? 

>ff!l"».J^w<«!S"?S. 


S/        ;SSS|S^;«  'K 

*»•       '  •     tmwt  '   *l*   *x   .  • 

*?%      »    55  ^^..Si.**  « 

«s  •»•»..   »  ••  »2lltt5"'f 

f -*&£&£ 


.;*,«* 

t* 

iiy 


L. 


******* 
m  *l 

*S8%S 

^yllillE^M.^  — 

««»» -,,.:•        m    .,:•.--    -*««»* 


gg 


->  ««»•:;»« 

" 


>  '»  t  t 


: 

:  s : . 


II  !M%S  j!rsB8..  *  *.|!|^! 
...  *-«r.j**BBJs8^  1 1 ;  *"!"!• 


tEXAGONS  AND  8Q0A.RE3  IN  DARNED  NET. 


55 


For  directions  see  page  23. 


Making  Bohemian   Lace. 


A.  BBOAD    EDQ1.NU. 

The  novelty  of  this  lace  lies  in  its 
simplicity  of  design  and  execution. 

The  design  must  form  a  series  of 
curves,  in  fact,  any  simple  braiding 
pattern  can  be  followed  for  this  make 
of  lace,  so  long  as  sharp  corners  are 
avoided  as  much  as  possible. 

Materials  required  :  A  very  narrow 
lace  braid,  or  even  tape  of  the 
narrowest  make  will  answer  the 
purpose,  though  the  lace  braid  is 
finer.-  Tack  the  braid  carefully  over 
your  pattern.  Fill  in  the  spaces  by 
taking  a  thread  from  one  side  of  the 
braid  to  the  other  as  for  herring- 
boning,  but  fastening  the  thread  each 
time  with  a  sort  of  knot  formed  thus : 
Hold  down  the  2  strands  of  thread 


with  the  thumb,  make  a  button-hole 
stitch  over  these  2  strands.  Draw  up 
tightly,  thus  forming  a  kind  of  knot. 
Continue  on  opposite  side  the  same. 

To  form  a  variety,  the  stitches  are 
made  more  closely  together  in  the 
narrow  spaces,  and  the  very  wide 
spaces  are  filled  in  in  the  same 
manner,  with  a  simple  lace  or  button- 
hole stitch. 

In  the  more  elaborate  designs, 
button-holed  bars  fill  in  the  very 
wide  spaces. 

This  make  of  lace  is  most  effective 
for  infants'  garments,  lingerie  frocks, 
jabots,  and  collars. 

It  also  has  a  handsome  effect  when 
let  into  table  linen  of  a  fine  quality. 


This  could  be  inserted  in  the  end  of  a  Sideboard  Cloth, 
or  in  a  linen  Tea  Cosy  Cover,  as  illustrated  on  page  47. 

56 


The   Educational   Value  of 
the   Doll. 


The  educational  value  of  the  Doll 
is  just  beginning  to  be  realized  by  the 
mothers  and  teachers  of  small  girls ; 
so  that  at  last  we  have  the  making  of 
doll's  clothes  included  in  the  curri- 
culum of  certain  schools. 

This  is  undoubtedly  a  step  in  the 
right  direction.  The  little  girl  who 


when  she  in  turn  has  little  people  to 
sew  for.  In  the  same  way,  the  small 
girl  who  has  been  shown  how  to 
bring  I^ady  Arabella's  "  last  season's 
party  frock"  up-to-date,  by  altering 
the  sleeves,  or  the  fulness  of  the 
skirt  —  as  the  latest  mode  may 
demand  —  will  save  many  a  dress- 


An 

Inser- 
tion 
with 
only 
simple 
stitches 


An 
Edge 

in 

Bohe- 
mian 
Lace, 
show- 
i  n  g 
button- 
holed 


has  taken  a  part  in  making  her  doll's 
wardrobe,  and  then  in  keeping  it  up- 
to-date,  will  find  that  the  knowledge 
she  has  gained  in  this  way  will 
be  invaluable  to  her  in  after  life. 
The  child  who  has  helped  to  put 
together  her  doll's  combinations,  will 
have  no  difficulty  in  making  her  own 
later  on,  neither  will  she  be  perplexed 


maker's  bill  presently,  when  her  own 
frocks  show  signs  of  growing  out-of- 
date. 

But  this  instruction  as  to  the  doll's 
wearing  apparel  is  only  the  beginning 
of  the  educational  possibilities  of  the 
doll.  The  next  step  is  to  encourage 
the  little  girl  to  see  to  the  household 
linen  and  general  furnishings  of  the 


57 


The  Value  of 
the  Doll. 


doll's  house.  If  a  real  doll's  house 
is  not  forthcoming  at  the  moment,  an 
excellent  substitute  can  be  made  out 
of  a  wooden  box  turned  up  on  end, 
with  a  few  shelves  put  in  to  supply 
the  necessary  succession  of  "floors." 
Once  you  have  contrived  something 
that  you  can  call  a  doll's  house — and 
the  child's  innate  love  of  "make 
believe"  will  enable  you  to  do  this 
easily — doll's  furniture  can  b« 
procured  at  very  little  cost,  and  the 
etceteras  can  be  supplied  by  your  own 
ingenuity. 

First  the  bedclothes  and  bedding 
should  be  made.  It  will  be  best  for 
the  child  if  you  make  all  this  your- 
selves, rather  than  buy  the  small 
bolster  and  pillows  at  the  toy  shop. 

Show  her  how  to  make  the  small 
feather  bed,  and  how  to  stuff  the 
pillows.  She  can  make  a  little 
mattress  from  small  cloth  clippings; 
this  will  teach  her  the  value  of  tiny 
waste  bits  of  material.  Have  every- 
thing as  complete  as  you  can,  from 
the  under  blanket  to  the  ornamental 
bedspread ;  and  show  her  how  to 
make  the  bed  in  a  proper  way.  A 
valance  will  be  received  with  accla- 
mation, and  you  can  show  her  how 
to  fasten  it  on  with  tapes. 

A  nightdress  pocket  is  sure  to 
delight  any  little  maid;  and  in  using 
it  for  Lady  Arabella's  elegant  night- 
gown, she  will  learn,  unconsciously, 
what  she  must  do  with  her  own. 

A  little  Linen  Bag  can  also  be  made 
to  serve  a  useful  purpose;  and  if  Lady 
Arabella  is  always  taught  to  put  dis- 
carded garments  in  her  Linen  Bag, 
preparatory  to  sending  them  to  the 
wash,  the  other  little  lady  will  be 
learning  tidy  methodical  ways  at  the 
same  time. 

Doll's  cupboards  can  be  bought  at 


most  toy  shops  for  a  few  pence;  turn 
one  of  these  into  a  linen  press,  and 
have  it  furnished  under  your  super- 
vision with  tablecloths,  serviettes, tray- 
cloths,  towels  and  toilet  covers,  as  well 
as  with  bed  linen.  Shew  the  little 
housewife  how  to  ornament  the  guest 
towels,  how  to  fold  the  serviettes  and 
tablecloths  correctly,  how  to  put  a  bit 
of  edging  round  the  toilet  covers  and 
tray  cloths,  and  how  to  let  in  a  fancy 
corner  into  the  5  o'clock  tea-cloth. 
If  she  is  old  enough  to  do  some  of  the 
ornamentations  for  herself,  so  much 
the  better;  let  her  try  to  do  a  very 
simple  cross-stitch  border  round  a 
sideboard  cloth  for  Lady  Arabella's 
dining  room ;  any  coarse  piece  of 
canvas  will  serve,  so  long  as  the 
cotton  is  a  pretty  colour. 

In  this  way  you  will  not  only  be 
instilling  in  your  child  a  love  of 
housewifely  things,  and  fostering  the 
instinct  for  home-making  that  is  born 
in  most  baby  girls,  but  you  will  be 
teaching  her  the  right  way  to  do- 
things,  and  what  is  required  in  a 
properly  conducted  household;  also, 
you  will  be  training  her  to  make  the 
things  she  needs.  And  none  of  this 
need  be  any  tax  on  the  brain.  It  will 
all  be  absorbed  with  the  utmost 
delight,  as  play. 

But  do  not  misunderstand  me.  I 
am  not  advocating  that  the  mother 
should  invariably  supervise  the  child's 
play. 

I  think  a  child  should  be  allowed 
the  old-time  freedom  in  this  respect : 
rthe  modern  custom  of  helping  or 
training  or  assisting  a  child  to  play 
only  tends  to  dwarf  its  self  reliance 
and  stunt  its  ingenuity.  But  while 
the  little  girl  has  plenty  of  time  to 
amuse  herself  with  the  doll's  house 
as  she  pleases,  it  is  easy  for  the  mother 


58 


Teaching  a  Child 
to  Sew. 


to  get  in  her  instructions  by  the  way. 
She  can  announce  that  she  is  going 
to  pay  a  ceremonious  visit  to  Lady 
Arabella,  and  the  house  must  be  put 
in  applepie  order  for  the  occssion. 
Then  the  guest  towels  can  be  hanging 
over  the  towel  horse :  fresh  covers  on 
the  drawing-room  cushions,  the  best 
bedspread  over  the  bed,  and  the 
serviettes  in  their  bead-rings  round 
the  dining-room  table. 

Having  the  child  make  the  house 
and  bed  linen  teaches  her  how  to  sew 
with  very  little  irksomeness.  Each 
article  is  so  small  that  it  can  be 
quickly  finished,  and  is  not  like  the 
large  pieces  of  work  that  were  given 
children  to  do  a  generation  ago.  Few 
children  can  get  up  any  enthusiasm 


over  hemming  a  duster!  But  it  will 
be  the  exceptional  girl  who  is  not 
eager  to  hem  the  small  sheet  for  the 
doll's  bed  and  put  a  piece  of  lace  at 
the  edge ;  and  if  mother  can  find — 
or  evolve — a  monogram  or  initial  for 
the  pillow-case,  needlework  will  take- 
on  an  added  delight  in  the  eyes  of 
the  small  person.  To  learn  to  make- 
a  buttonhole  properly  is  dull  work, 
for  a  young  girl,  yet  it  is  necessary,, 
as  we  most  of  us  need  this  knowledge 
as  we  grow  older;  but  if  she  learns 
the  stitch  in  the  first  instance  by 
buttonholing  the  top  of  the  doll's 
blanket  a  bright  blue  or  red,  she  wilt 
be  acquiring  useful  information  as 
well  as  a  good  deal  of  pleasure  in 
doing  this  piece  of  work. 


For   a   Curtain    Border. 


Darned  filet  net  is  one  of  the  most 
artistic  forms  of  fancy-work.  It  is 
always  in  fashion  and  affords  ample 
scope  for  one's  own  designing,  which 
can  be  carried  out  to  our  own  ideas 
of  the  manner  in  which  it  should  be 
worked.  Simple  darning  stitch  is 
^used,  in  which  the  thread  is  run  in 
and  out  through  the  meshes  in 
sufficient  rows  to  fill  a  line  of  the 
meshes  in  any  direction  required. 
The  outline  of  the  motif  is  worked 

in  this  way  with  soft  embroidery 
cotton,  then  additional  value  is 

assured   to  the  work  by  -,-r— 

"filling  in"  with  any  fancy 

stitches  with  which  we  are 

acquainted .  This  design , 

while  suggested  for  a  cur- 
tain border,  will  also  serve 

for  an  insertion  border  for 

a  tea-cloth,  cushion-cover, 

or  it  could  be  adapted  for 

a  delightful  cot-cover  over 

a  pink  or  blue  satin  lining. 


For  this  purpose  a  centre  motif,  or  a 
group  of  them,  such  as  that  in  the  cor- 
ner could  be  put  in  the  centre  of  the 
cover. 

I 


AN 

EFFECTIVE 

DESIGN     IN 

DARNED 

NET. 


A   Lesson   in    Hemstitching. 


TT1 


Pig.  1.— SIMPLE  HEMSTITCHING. 

The  best  finish 
for  all  kinds  of 
work  that  require 
frequent  washing 
is  the  hemstitched 
hem.  This  can  be 
of  various  depths, 
and  either  plain 
hemstitching  o  r 
very  elaborate  work 
of  the  "drawn 
thread  "kind,  with 
fancy  stitchery. 
L/inen  sheets  and 
pillow-cases  afford 
samples  of  articles 


Pig.  8. — DOUBLE  LADDER   STITCH. 


openwork  liked,  must  be  drawn  from 
the  material  immediately  under  the 
edge  of  the  hem. 

In  Fig.  1,  which  shows  plain  hem- 
stitching, 4  threads  only  were  drawn. 
Mark  the  depth  of  the  hem  required 
and  draw  out  the  4  threads  below  the 
line  where  the  edge  of  the  hem  is  to 
be.  Turn  down  the  hem  and  tack  it 
in  place.  With  the  embroidery  cotton 
or  linen  thread,  and  an  ordinary 
sewing  needle, 
commence  by  fas- 
tening the  thread 
to  the  end  of  the 
hem  with  a  few 
stitches,  at  the  left 
side,  *  slip  the 
needle  in  from 
right  to  left  under 
3  of  the  threads, 
draw  it  out  and  put 
the  needle  upwards 
through  the  edge 
of  the  hem  under 
the  2nd  horizontal 
thread,  *  repeat. 


Fig.  5.— THE    SERPENTINE   STITCH. 

which  are  improved  by  a  deep  hem 
ornamented  with  some  openwork 
veining.  Coloured  embroidery  cottons 
or  white  are  used  with  good  effect,  and 
the  number  of  stitches  that  can  be 
•employed  is  indefinite. 

For  all  hemstitching  a  number  of 
threads,  depending  upon  the  width  of 


Some  people  work  from  right  to 
left  of  the  hem.    In  this  case  the 
working  thread  is  held  in  a 
loop  with  the  left  thumb, 
while  passing  the 
needle    under    the 
fabric    threads, 
and  the  needle 
brought  out 
through 
t  h  e 
loop. 


Fig.  2.— SHOWING  HOW  TO  TURN  A  CORNB1 

The  black  line  along  the  bottom  is 
merely  the  end  of  the  cotton. 


60 


Right  and 
Wrong  Sides. 


iliiiiiiiifififiiiri 


Fig.  8,— TWISTED  OPENWORK  BARS. 

Figure  2  shows  how  to  turn  a  corner 
for  this  plain  hemstitching.  You 
mark  lines  for  the 
hem  and  draw  the 
threads  as  before, 
then  fold  the 
material  diagonally 
through  the  corner 
as  in  the  illustra- 
tion. This  gives 
you  a  small  tri- 
angle in  the  corner. 
Fold  back  the  dia- 
gonal edge  of  the 
triangle  to  get  the 
half  of  it  and  crease 
along  this  line. 
Now  back-stitch 
along  the  creased 
line  down  to  where 
you  turn  in  the  edge  of  the  hem. 
Cut  away  the  corner  outside  the  seam, 


Fig.   9.— WRONG  SIDE  OF  DOUBLE 
LADDER  STITOH. 


Fig.  4. — THE  LADDER  STITOH. 

which  you  fold  down  flat,  turn  this- 

corner  section  inside  out  and  you  have 

a  neat  line  on  the 

••••^••^•fl  wrong  side  of  your 
hem  going  diago- 
nally from  the 
corner  to  the  edge 
of  the  hem. 

Figure  3  shows 
thishem  with  a  row 
of  stitching  which 
twists  the  open- 
work bars.  Pro- 
ceed as  before  with 
the  hem,  but  take 
an  even  number  of 
threads  with  each 
stitch  ;  in  this  case 
4  were  taken .  Fas- 
ten the  thread  to  the 
end  of  the  openwork  at  the  left,  *  insert 
the  needle  after  the  next  4th  thread, 


s^jffiMsifflffi^ 


Fig.   6.— DOUBLE   SERPENTINE   STITCH. 


Fig.   7.— WRONG  SIDE  OF  DOUBLE 
SERPENTINE   STITCH. 


61 


A  Lesson  in 
Hemstitching. 

•and  turning  the  point  backwards  to 
left  again  bring  it  up  under  the  3rd 
•and  4th  threads,  over  the  2nd  and  1st, 
twist  the  needle  round  underneath 
this  group  and  bring  it  up  again  after 
the  4th  thread,  *  repeat. 

Figure  4  shows  the  hemstitching 
worked  at  both  sides  of  the  openwork . 
This  is  known  as  the  ladder-stitch 
and  is  worked  the  same  at  both  sides; 
instead  of  putting  the  thread  through 
the  edge  of  the  hem  at  the  other  side 
you  put  it  under  the  2nd  horizontal 
thread  in  the  edge  of  the  material. 

Figured. — The  serpentine  stitch,  for 
which  a  greater  number  of  theads  are 
drawn,  eight  being  taken  out  for  the 
sample.  An  even  number  of  threads 
is  necessary.  Hemstitch  with  4 
threads,  then  at  the  other  side  hem- 
stitch in  the  same  way,  but  take  the 

A  Good  Finish 

Fold  canvas  back  as  far  as  work  is  to 
go  that  there  may  be  the  firmness  of 
double  material  for  the  long  stitches. 
The  illustration  will  show  the  working 
of  alternate  colours. 

Place  a  netting  inesh  of  ivory  or 
steel, 
some- 
times 
wood, 
even  with 
the  edge. 
Take  a 
thread- 
ed rug 
needle 
over  this 
from  each 
hole  in 

the  canvas  10  times.  Next  the  other 
needleful  of  second  colour  10  times. 
When  the  mesh  is  full,  the  upper 
part  can  be  made  from  9  threads. 

Make  9  stitches  of  graduated  lengths, 
the  longest  one  9  threads  high,  cross 


last  half  of  the  1st  group  with  the  1st 
half  of  the  2nd,  and  so  on. 

Figure  6. — The  double  serpentine 
stitch.  Here  2  groups  of  thread  are 
drawn,  leaving  a  plain  strip  of  material 
between  them .  Draw  8  threads,  leave 
4,  draw  8.  Hemstitch  the  top  row  and 
the  lower  edge,  then  hemstitch  at  the 
sides  next  to  the  plain  strip,  but 
instead  of  putting  the  needle  through 
the  material  take  a  stitch  at  each  side 
alternately. 

Figure  7  shows  the  wrong  side  of 
this  hem. 

Figure  8. — These  are  plain  bars 
worked  as  in  Fig.  4,  but  with  a  plain 
strip  as  in  No.  7,  which  is  worked  in 
the  same  way. 

Figure  9  shows  the  wrong  side  of 
Fig.  8. 

for  Canvas  Work. 

corners.  These  should  be  the  same 
colour  as  the  tassel.  The  shorter  and 
more  open  threads  the  reverse  way  are 
the  colour  of  the  next  tassel,  the  centre 
longest  one  first,  three  each  side,  leav- 
ing a  clear  opening  between  each  two. 

The 
mesh  can 
now  be 
d  r  awn 
from 
throu  gh 
the  loops 
along  it. 
Wind 
round 
and  cut 
once  20 
strands 

of  each  colour,  place  a  short  length 
of  the  thread  through  the  loops 
and  hold  the  cut  ends  taut  to  them 
and  tie  tight  through  *the  middle, 
pulling  down  firm,  and  afterwards 

clipping  even. 
62 


The   Marguerite  Glove  and 
Handkerchief  Sachet. 


The  accom- 
panying illus- 
trations show 
something 
quite  new  in 
the  way  of 
decorating  a 
glove  and 
handkerchief 
sachet.  The 
very  realistic 
marguerites 
are  made  by 
covering  a 
shilling -sized 
button  mould 
with  satin, 
silk  or  sateen, 
and  then  sew- 
ing on  to  the 
wrong  side, 
some  old- 
fashioned 
white  vandyke 
braid.  This 
braid  should 
be  put  on 
with  an  "over- 
sew" stitch, 
point  by 
point,  push- 
ing each  as 
closely  to- 
gether as 
possible. 


THE  GLOVE  SACHET. 


When  finish- 
ed a  running  thread  should  be  placed 
through  the  centre  of  the  braid,  right 
round   the   circle,    in   order  to  keep 
each  "petal"  in  position. 

The  vandyke  braid  used  in  these 
designs  is  three-quarters  of  an  inch 
in  depth. 


The  buds 
consist  of  six 
points  of  braid 
gathere  d 
tightly  to- 
gether, and 
enclosed  in  a 
li  ttle  silk 
calyx.  The 
raw  edges 
should  be 
turned  in- 
wards, and 
running 
stitches  used 
top  and  bot- 
tom. 

The  tubular 
cord  represen 
ting  the 
b  r  a  i  d  i  n  g 
stems  is  made 
by  covering 
ordinary  cord 
with  silk  or 
satin.  As  this 
is  sometimes 
rather  stiff, 
however, 
instead  of 
using  the  soft 
cord,  three  or 
four  strands 
of  wool  will 
be  found 
much  easier, 

as  it  will  turn  and  twist  more 
satisfactorily.  After  preparing  the 
cord,  place  it  carelessly  on  the  sides 
of  the  sachet,  turn  it  at  intervals, 
and  tie  a  loose  knot  or  two.  Let  it 
"  wiggle  "  itself  into  a  pattern. 

The  sachets  are  made  in  the  usual 


63 


The  Marguerite 
Handkerchief  Sachet. 

way  by  covering  fairly  stiff  book 
muslin  with  a  thin  layer  of  wadding, 
then  tacking  over  the  outer  side, 
sateen  or  silk.  Work  all  the  out- 
side decoration  next  so  that  the 
stitches  can  be  taken  right  through, 


and  finally  line  the  inside.  The 
fastenings  oil  these  satchets  are  made 
by  inserting  little  stiffened  silk  tabs 
between  the  outer  cover  and  inside 
lining,  and  sewing  on  ordinary  spring 
punch  buttons. 


This 

ban  cl  ker- 
chief 
sachet  is 
made  in 
the  same 
way  as 
the  glove 
sachet. 


The  only 
difference 
is  that 
ordinary 
cord  is 
used,  and 
not  the 
tubular 
cord. 


Needlepoints. 

Never  hem  or  machine  around  the  bottom  of  a  light  frock 
that  is  liable  to  shrink  in  the  washing  or  cleaning.  Fasten  the 
hem  down  with  French  knots.  These  can  easily  be  cut  if  the 
ckirt  needs  lengthening. 

Always  turn  up  a  deep  hem  on  light  skirts,  for  use  in  case 
of  shrinkage. 

Hem-stitching  can  be  done  with  far  less  strain  to  the 
eyesight  if  a  dark  finger-shield  be  used.  With  this  the  white 
threads  show  up  very  clearly. 

Floor  rugs  that  show  any  tendency  to  fray  at  the  ends 
should  be  bound  with  Carpet  Binding,  which  can  be  procured 
from  any  upholsterer  or  furnishing  draper. 


64 


Beads  and  Bead=work. 


The  woman  for  whom  beads  have 
QO  attraction  is  not  easy  to  find.  • 
An  admiration  for  beads  is  a  char- 
acteristic of  women  of  most 
nationalties.  In  the  present  day 
it  is  possible  to  get  some  really 
beautiful  beads,  and  they  can  be 
used  in  so  many  different  ways- 
that  delightful  necklaces  and 
chains  can  be  made.  Some  of  tht 
season's  novelties  are  really  lovely 
A  few  are  illustrated  here,  but  in 
pictures  of  this  kind  it  is  quite 
impossible  to  portray  the  beaut} 
of  the  beads.  Still,  with  some 
little  description,  these  will  give 
an  idea  of  what  can  be  obtained 
and  made. 

The  necklace  shown  at  the  top  of 
this  page  is  made  of  Venetian  beads 
of  a  lovely  shade  of  Turquoise,  in- 
terspersed with  gold  filigree  beads, 
the  tiny  beads   being   of   metal,  the 
same  shade  as  the  Venetian.     As  will 
be  seen  from  the  illustration,  a  double 


A    MOST   SIMPLE  CHAIN   TO   MAKB. 


Or  TURQUOISE  VENETIAN  AND 
GOLD  FILIGREE  BEADS. 


row  of  small  beads  is  used  for  the 
upper  portion ,  but  after  being  threaded 
through  the  long  bead  on  each  side, 
the  threads  divide,  and  a  pendant 
effect  is  given.  A  chain  of  this 
description  is  not  at  all  difficult  to 
make. 

Another  illustration  shows  a  very 
effective  necklace  made  of  two  kinds 
of  Venetian  beads,  the  dark  ones 
being  black  covered  with  exquisite 
little  coloured  flowers,  while  the 
lighter  ones  are  of  crystal  and  gold, 
with  spots  of  pink.  Between  are  gold 
torse  beads  and  gold  glass  bugles. 
The  chain  is  made  on  one  thread  only 
and  is  the  simplest  kind  to  make,  and 
it  is — as  will  easily  be  seen— most 
effective. 

The  little  bracelet  is  made  on  two 
rows  of  bead  wire,  and  is  of  Cats' 
Eyes  (flat  green  beads)  and  small 
aluminium  beads.  A  great  advantage 
of  these  aluminium  beads  is  that  they 


65 


C.N.     K 


The  New  Bead 
Necklaces. 

will  not  taruish.  These  beads  are, 
of  course,  equally  suitable  for  neck- 
laces and  chains,  and  also  for  hair 
ornaments 

The  largest  illustration  shows 
several  chains.  A  particularly  pretty 
one  is  the  second  from  the  top.  This 
is  made  of  one  of  the  prettiest  kinds 
of  beads — the  medallion.  This  is  a 
flat  round  bead,  and  one  which  is 
preferred  by  a  good  many,  because  it 
shows  so  prettily  on  the  blouse.  This 
particular  chain  is  of  an  exquisite 
shade  of  blue,  but  these  beads  can  be 
obtained  in  other  shades.  The  small 
beads  used  here  are  silver  metal 
beads,  while  at  each  side  of  the 
medallion  bead  is  a  gold  torse  bead. 

The  illustration  immediately  below 
the  medallion  necklace  shows  one 
made  of  Venetian  beads,  the  par- 
ticular attraction  of  which  lies  in  the 
fact  that  no  two  Venetian  beads  used 
in  its  manufacture  are  alike.  The 
connecting  beads  are  small  gold 


filigree  (next  to   the  Venetian  beads) 
with  gold  metal  beads  in  between. 

A  section  of  a  long  mosaic  bead 
chain  is  shown  under.  This  gives  a 
pleasing  example  of  how  pretty  a 
colour  scheme  may  be  obtained  with 
fairly  sombre  shades.  The  actual 
mosaic  bead — the  large  one  —  has 
tones  of  green,  yellow,  blue  and 
white.  *  Next  to  it  is  a  green  bead, 
2  small  gold,  7  bronze,  2  gold.  Then 
follow  a  brown  bead  the  same  size  as 
the  green  referred  to,  2  gold,  7  bronze. 
1  gold,  52  tin}7  green  metal  beads,  1 
gold,  7  bronze,  2  gold,  1  brown,  2 
gold,  7  bronze.  2  gold,  1  green,  2  gold, 
7  bronze,  2  gold,  1  green,  2  gold,  7 
bronze,  2  gold,  1  brown,  2  gold,  7 
bronze,  1  gold,  52  small  green,  1  gold, 
7  bronze,  2  gold,  1  brown,  2  gold, 
7  bronze,  2  gold,  1  green,  1  mosaic. 
Repeat  from  *. 

Those  whose  tastes  run  to  more 
delicate  productions,  however,  should 
see  the  Persian  beads.  A  necklace  of 


This 

shews  a 
number 
of  most 
effective 
necklaces 

and 
chains. 


The 
design  at 
the  top  is 
eqnally 
B  nit  able 
for  a  Hair 
Bandeau. 


66 


About   Hair 
Ornaments. 


A  Pretty 
Tiara  for 
the  hair 
IB  shown 
here. 


these  is  shown  immediately  below  the 
mosaic   chain.     These   beads  can   be 
obtained  in  various  sizes  and  shapes, 
and  show  for  the  most  part,  beautiful 
pale  shades  on  white  grounds,  giving 
the   beads    the 
appearance  of  deli- 
cate   china.      This 
particular  necklace 
is    made     on    two 
threads,    which    at 
intervals  are   divi- 
ded and  then  con- 
nected again.    The 
colours  in  this  are 
Wedgewood    blue, 
pale    coral,     silver 
and  white,  and  it  is 
quite  impossible  to 
describe  the  beauty 
of    this    attractive 
little  article. 

The  top  design  shows  a  chain  of 
two  sizes  of  a  beautiful  amethyst 
bead,  with  small  seed  pearls  between. 
These  amethyst  beads,  like  the  Cat's 
Eyes,  have  two  holes  on  each  side, 
.and  therefore  are  always  used  with 
.two  rows  of  small  beads.  This  fact, 
.and  the  flat  character  of  the  beads, 
-makes  them  very  suitable  for  hair 
•bandeaux,  especially  as  this  shape  can 
be  obtained  in  other  colours.  For 
-instance,  the  kind  known  as  Fire 
•Opals  look  very  lovely  in  the  hair, 
also  the  Moonstone  Jewels. 

While  on  the  subject  of  hair  orna- 
unents,  the  tiara  shown  is  worth 


Of 

Bar  oque 
Pearls 
and  Gold 
Glass 
Beads. 


A    BBACELET    OP    CATS'    EYES 
AND    ALUMINIUM    BEADS. 


attention.  It  is  made  of  Baroque 
Pearls  (gold  coloured  long  beads) 
with  gold  glass  beads  between.  A 
point  about  these  Baroque  Pearls 
which  makes  them  so  useful  for 
wearing  in  the  hair 
is  that  they  are 
exceedingly  light 
in  weight. 

Hair  bands  can 
also  be  made  with 
two  sizes  of  pearl 
beads,  a  rather 
large  size  for  the 
edges  and  smaller 
for  the  trellis-work 
between  —  the 
favourite  mode. 
Str i  ng  the  pearls  on 
very  fine  wire,  to 
be  obtained  at  any 
large  drapery  shop  (used  for  binding 
the  stems  of  millinery  flowers, 
principally).  This  wire  is  very  fine 
and  pliable,  and  can  readily  be 
"threaded"  through  the  beads  with- 
out the  use  of  a  needle.  Make  the  2 
edges  of  the  band  first  and  secure  both 
ends.  Fasten  the  wire  to  the  first 
bead  and  commence  the  trellis-work 
by  threading  as  many  beads  as  will 
go  diagonally  through  what  would  be 
a  square  between  the  2  edges,  get  the 
first  line  right  and  the  rest  cannot  go 
wrong,  foryon  simply  thread  the  same 
number  of  beads  each  time  and  fasten 
by  twining  the  wire  around  that  in 
the  outside  rows  between  the  2  beads 


67 


Beads    and 
Bead-work. 


where  the  lines  cross,  going  from  one 
side  to  the  other  alternately,  in  right 
angles.  According  to  the  closeness  of 
the  lines,  the  number  of  beads  between 
each  diagonal  line  must  be  even,  or 
divisible  by  3.  When  the  first  row  is 
finished,  fasten  the  wire  to  the  edge, 
after  the  second  or  third  bead,  and 
thread  the  same  number  as  before  and 
fasten  after  the  second  or  third  bead 
at  the  other  side.  Fill  all  the  angles 
in  this  way,  winding  the  wire  once 
around  each  line  that  it  crosses,  keep- 
ing the  number  of  beads  at  each  side 
of  the  trellis  equal.  The  ends  of  the 
band  are  generally  finished  with  a 
large  "  cabachon  "  made  with  pearls 
or  contrasting  beads. 

Net  blouses  for  evening  wear, 
spangled  with  beads,  are  also  very 
easy  to  make.  In  Brussels  net  the 
meshes  run  in  straight  lines  and  in 


angles  to  each  other,  and  it  is  an  easy 
thing  to  form  geometrical  designs  by 
simply  following  the  lines  in  any  way 
selected.  The  beads  are  fastened  in 
place  with  a  knot  stitch  for  each,  so 
that  in  the  event  of  one  getting  pulled 
off,  others  near  it  may  not  fall  off  too, 
as  is  the  case  with  the  bought  beaded 
net.  Beaded  fringes  for  edging 
draperies  are  so  easily  made  that  there 
is  no  need  to  describe  them. 

Then  for  belts,  bags,  etc.,  there  is 
the  apache  bead  work  that  any  girl 
can  easily  make  on  the  little  loom 
made  and  sold  for  the  purpose.  This 
can  be  obtained  from  Mr.  F.  K. 
Rogier,  14,  High  Street,  Kensington, 
London,  \V.,  with  all  the  materials 
requisite.  Here,  too,  can  be  had  very 
large  and  varied  selection  of  beads  of 
every  kind.  He  will  send  price  lists, 
sample  cards,  etc.,  on  approval. 


A  Bag  to  Match  Your  Costume. 


In  the  present  day  a  bag  is  no  longer 
merely  a  bag,  but  it  is  a  very  im- 
portant accessory 
to  the  well-dressed 
woman.  The 
shape,  style,  and 
colour  are  carefully 
considered,  with  a 
view  to  suiting  tin- 
costume  with 
which  it  is  to  be 
used.  Such  a  one 
can  quite  easily  be 
made,  and  will 
give  a  very  dis- 
tinctive look.  The 
bag  here  illustrated 
was  made  of  satin 
of  a  pretty  mole 
shade  to  match 
the  dress  of  the 


wearer.  The  simple  diagonal  stitch- 
ing was  done  in  soft  embroidery  silk 
of  the  same  colour, 
and  at  the  points 
of  intersection  a 
coral  bead  was 
sewn.  This  touch 
of  brighter  colour 
matched  the  coral 
trimming  in 
costume  and  hat. 
The  cord  and 
tassels  were  of  the 
mole  shade.  A 
bag  of  this  kind 
is  quite  simple 
to  make,  and 
practically  any 
colour  -or 
material  could 
be  used 


A  Hardanger  Embroidery 

Cloth. 


For  this  cloth  a  square  of  Hardanger 
or  Congress  Canvas  of  medium  mesh 
is  required,  and  the  work  is  done  in 
Faudel's  Vivid  Lustre  for  the  solid 
work,  and  Faudel's  Sylkoline  for  the 
weaving. 

Commence  the  work  about  6  inches 


middle  of  each.  To  turn  the  corner, 
work  a  2nd  row  of  blocks  by  the  side 
of  the  upper  half  of  the  last  diamond, 
which  row  forms  the  1st  side  of  the 
diamond  for  the  2nd  side  of  the  cloth. 
The  blocks  of  the  lower  half  of  the  2 
diamonds  are  continued  in  a  straight 


*»•       '  ....          -am 
»n*     »•»«    •      ••••••  ,,i     m,,  mmmmm 

•ma  m       •"*       "*•«  '"-       »••*     **»« 

.:•=•:!  1.H "   Hs::-!5" "Hj J  "5:::::;;X 

.S"       "32.  "5"»»«       »«•• 


•  •*        ••» 

•  •••* 

mm" 


•• 


.£        i 

V 


"! 


mmm          mmm 
mmm     •       •    mmm 


»•• 

JL 

•It*         «•»• 


mmm     -      m 

»••     •• 

mmmmm 


r'*H? 

*>!«  »»M 


r«« 
m 


BOB      »»»      «  .    S      S  •»«•»»  r     5          mmmmm 

5         •*•          •»  »«»•      »••»  •*•      «••  »•••      »»««      **• 


- 
**** 


I*      .      •«•         S 

<•»      •••  »••«      •• 

'•'  *»*• 


THE  FINISHED  CLOTH  LOOKS  VERY  HANDSOME. 

from  the  outside  edge,  and  120threads 
from  the  middle  of  a  side.  Begin  at 
the  lowest  point  of  the  1st  diamond, 
and  work  11  blocks  of  5  stitches  over 
4  threads.  Continue  this  up  and  down 
for  the  4  diamonds,  working  the  top 
halves  to  correspond,  and  leaving  4 
threads  between  the  2  blocks  in  the 


line  across  the  corner, — there  must  be 
an  extra  block  worked  in  the  space 
between  the  two  halves  of  the  last 
diamond,  so  that  there  will  be  11 
blocks  on  each  side  of  this  extra  block 
in  this  straight  row. 

Continue  the  diamonds,  4  on  each 
side,  around  the  cloth,  then  work-in 


69 


A  Hardanger 
Embroidery  Cloth. 

the  small  inner  diamonds.  These 
consist  of  6  blocks  at  each  side  of  the 
diamond,  and  care  must  be  taken  to 
work  them  exactly  opposite  the  cor- 
responding blocks  in  the  outer  dia- 
monds, so  that  the  threads  are  correct 
for  the  openwork.  The  crosses  are 
then  filled  in,  beginning  in  the  centre 
hole,  6  stitches  are  taken  on  the 
diagonal,  each  stitch  being  raised  a 
mesh,  and  the  2nd  row  of  each  point 
being  taken  into  the  same  hole  as  the 
first.  The  eyelet  holes  are  worked  at 
each  side  in  the  space  between  the 
points. 

Next  fill  in  the  triangles  at  the  out- 
side of  the  diamonds  with  halves  of 
stars,  making  the  stitches  of  the  lower 
side  level  with  the  lowest  block  of  the 
diamond.  Fill  in  the  single  eyelet 
holes  between  the  points  of  the  star, 
and  then  work  4  eyelet  holes  together, 
making  the  inside  stitches  of  all  4 
meet  in  1  hole,  which  forms  a  small 
hole  in  the  centre. 


Each  side  of  the  diamonds  is  next 
outlined  with  3  rows  of  backstitching, 
making  each  row  finish  in  the  same 
row  of  the  mesh  as  the  lowest  block  of 
the  diamond.  An  eight-pointed  star 
is  worked  on  the  outside  of  each 
corner. 

When  the  solid  work  is  completed, 
the  threads  are  cut  for  the  woven  and 
whipped  bars,  which  are  worked  in 
the  spaces  between  the  inner  and  outer 
diamonds,  the  whipping  and  weaving 
being  worked  in  alternate  diamonds. 
For  the  woven  bars  the  threads  are  cut 
at  the  sides  of  all  the  blocks,  and  those 
left  are  woven  with  a  picot  in  the 
middle  of  each  side  of  each  bar.  For 
the  whipped  bars  there  are  more 
threads  left  than  cut.  They  are  cut  at 
the  side  of  the  middle  block  of  the 
inner  diamond. 

Leave  uncut  the  next  2  sides  of  the 
blocks  round  the  diamond,  cut  the 
sides  of  the  next  2,  leave  uncut  the 
sides  of  the  end  block,  and  repeat  this 


* 

»*-* 

mm  mm* 

mmm', /mmm 

•  *'««     •     *a 

mmm  -    » 

:  m-mm"'"'-  ...     ;  mm 


;   •  •  » 

m  mm  mm 


mmm 


mm 

mmm 


mmmmm 
pill     *•««     •  ••• 

•••)• 


SHOWING   HOW  THE   COBNEB  IS  MANAGED. 


70 


Whipping  and 
Weaving. 


•••• 

.....  5 
"01  i  P; 


Hiin. 


THIS  SHOWS  THE  DETAIL  OF  THE  DIAMONDS. 

scheme  around  the  inner  diamond. 
Then  cut  the  same  threads  on  the 
inside  of  the  outer  diamond,  draw  the 
threads  and  whip. 

Next  the  4  threads  are  drawn  for  the 
openwork  rows  at  each  side  of  the 
insertion,  leaving  5  threads  between 
the  half  stars  and  the  1st  drawn 
thread. 

At  the  inner  side  of  the  corner  a  set 
of  4  blocks  must  be  arranged  to  hold 
the  cut  ends  of  these  threads.  This 
will  not  exactly  fit  into  the  double 
row  of  blocks  in  the  corner,  but  the 


sides  must  be  made  to  face  the  threads 
which  are  to  be  cut.  The  outside  row- 
must  be  held  in  some  such  way  as  is 
shown  in  the  illustration,  or  it  could 
be  carried  right  across  the  hem.  The 
threads  are  then  worked  in  sets  of  3 
bars — a  whipped  one  on  each  side 
of  woven  one,  and  the  three  are  then 
drawn  together  by  small  stitches  at 
the  back.  Bxcept  in  very  fine  canvas, 
it  will  be  found  sufficient  to  whip  3 
threads  together,  and  weave  two,  as, 
if  more  are  taken,  the  effect  is  clumsy 
when  drawn  together. 


71 


Braid    Applique   on    Net. 


Braid  Applique  affords  an  easy 
method  for  ornamenting  the  fine 
white  net  now  so  fashionable,  and 
some  of  the  designs  here  illustrated 
give  some  idea  of  the  variety  that  can 
be  obtained  in  this  way.  The  braid 
is  sewn  on  the  wrong  side  to  the  net 
in  any  simple  design,  then  the  net 
may  be  pleated  or  tucked  to  form  a 
frill,  or  the  work  may  be — and  very 
often  is— further  embellished  by  the 
addition  of  fine  crochet. 


In  most  of  the  designs  shown,  the 
tiny  picot  or  Mignardise  Braid  (also 
known  as  a  fine  Cordon  Braid)  has 
been  used  in  this  way ;  while  in 
one,  a  rather  coarser  braid  has  been 
used  as  well.  In  two  of  the  corners, 
which  would  make  handsome  finishes 
for  net  curtains,  fine  Feather- 
stitched  Braid  has  been  employed.  For 
blouse  trimmings,  jabots,  collars,  &c. , 
Honiton  Lace  Braid  can  be  used  with 
remarkably  good  effect.  Braid  can 


72 


also  be  applied  to  cambric  or  table 
linen.  Some  of  the  illustrations 
show  suitable  sprays  for  this.  Others 
will  doubtless  suggest  themselves 
to  the  worker.  Although  the  crochet 
is  not  necessary  in  every  case,  the 
work  is  improved  by  it,  and  we  give 
directions  for  it. 

A  Handsome 
Lace. 

In  the  wide  lace  on  page  72  a  flower 
spray  of  braid  is  shown,  then  as  a 
finish,  a  narrow  insertion  at  each 
side  of  a  strip  of  the  net  is  very 
appropriate.  Lace  frilling  is  attached 
to  the  insertion  in  which  the  pleats 
are  sewn  down  in  the  form  of  tucks, 
three  of  which  come  down  the  centre 
of  each  vandyke. 

For  the  Insertion. 

Use  two  strips  of  the  braid  and 
fine  crochet  cotton,  such  as  Peri- 
lusta  No.  80.  *  Into  each  of  2  picots 
1  d  c,  5  ch,  miss  a  picot,  3  tr  into 
next,  5  ch,  *  repeat. 

On  the  2nd  strip  work  the  same  on 
one  side  but  fasten  in  the  ch  imme- 
diately before  and  after  the  3  tr  to 
the  corresponding  chs  on  the  1st 
strip. 

At  each  of  the  outside  edges  put 
1  ch,  1  d  c  into  every  picot. 

The  vandyke  edging  is  worked  in  a 
similar  way  for  the  inside  rows,  but 
on  the  first  strip  *  miss  5  picots  after 
the  4th  group  of  3  tr.  1  ch.  3  tr  into 
the  6th  picot,  then  after  the  next  3rd 
group  5  ch,  2  d  c  (into  2nd  and  3rd 
picots),  9  ch,  2  d  c  into  next  2  picots, 
continue  the  5  ch  and  groups  of  trs 
for  4  groups  and  repeat  from  *  to  the 
end. 

Work  the  2nd  strip  in  the  same 
way,  commencing  at  the  top  of  the 
vandyke  and  join  as  in  the  insertion. 

For  the  top  outside  row  1  tr,  2  ch 


A  Wide 
Lace. 

into  every  picot,  missing  5  picots  in 
every  point  turned  downwards  and 
omitting  the  ch  between  the  trs  at 
each  side. 

The  Lower  Edging. 

1st  Row. — Commencing  at  the  first 
upward  point  in  the  picot  before  the 
last  group  of  3  tr,  on  the  other  side 
of  the  braid  put  2  tr,  *  miss  2  picots, 
1  tr  into  next,  1  tr  into  each  of  next 
two  2nd  picots,  miss  2  picots,  2  tr 
into  next,  3  ch,  2  tr  into  2nd  picot, 

3  times,  4  ch,  2  tr  into   2nd  picot, 
8  ch,   miss  2  picots,  2  d  c  into  next  2, 

4  ch,    2   d  c  into  2nd  next  picot,    5 
times,  8  ch,  2  tr  into  3rd  next  picot, 
4  ch,  miss  next  picot,  2  tr  into  next, 

3  ch,  2  tr  into  2nd  picot  3  times,  then 
repeat  from  *. 

'2nd  Row. — *  Into  each  of  the  3 
spaces  before  the  8  ch  loop  3  d  c, 

4  ch,  3  d  c,  10  tr,  1  d  c  into  next  loop, 
7  tr,  1  d  c  into  each  of  the  5  ch  loops, 
10  tr,   1   d  c  into  next,  into  each  of 
next  3  spaces  3  d  c,  4  ch,  3  d  c,   cross 
over  to  the  opposite  side  with   10  ch. 
picot   5   of   them,   5   ch,    and   repeat 
from  *. 

A  Continuous 
Border. 

Besides  the  two  kinds  of  braid, 
Manlove's  No.  42  Irish  Lace  Thread 
and  some  Breton  Net  are  required  for 
this  design. 

The  Leaf  Motif. 

Using  the  coarser  braid,  com- 
mence about  1^  inches  from  the  end 
of  the  braid  in  one  of  the  tiny  picots 
into  which  put  a  d  c,  5  ch,  picot  4  of 
them,  1  ch,  1  d  c  into  next  picot,  miss 
next  picot,  1  tr  into  next,  miss  next 
picot,  1  tr  into  next,  5  ch  picot  4  of 
them,  1  d  c  into  next  picot,  7  ch,  turn 
these  back  to  the  1st  loop  and  fasten 
with  a  d  c,  turn,  over  the  7  ch  put  4  d  c 
5ch4dc,  *ldc  into  the  braid  picot, 


73 


Braid  Applique 
on  Net. 


A  CONTIGUOUS  BORDER. 

5  ch  picot  4  of  them,  1  eh,  1  d  c  into 
next  picot,  7  ch  1  d  c  into  the  picot  on 
last  bar,  7  ch  1  d  c  into  next  picot  on 
braid,  turn,  over  each  of  these  bars 
put  4  d  c  5  ch  4  dc,  *  repeat  for  4  bars 
in  the  row. 

Work  a  corner  like  the  1st,  then 
connect  the  4  d  c  bars  with  3  ch  to  and 
from  the  picots  in  the  bars  and  next  4 
in  the  braid.  Cross  the  ends  of  the 
braid  and  secure  with  a  single  stitch 
through  the  2  together.  Continue 
with  the  2nd  leaflet  by  4  ch  1  dc  into 
2nd  picot,  6  ch  1  d  c  into  3rd,  7  ch  1  d  c 
into  the  4th,  5th,  7th,  9th,  llth,  and 
13th  picots,  then  7, 6,  5,  4  ch  into  next 

4  picots  respectively.     Cross  over  to 
the  1st  loop  into  which  put  4  d  c,  4  d  c 

5  ch  4  d  c  into  each  of  the  others, 
ending  with  4  dc  into  the  last.     Cross 
the  braid,  secure  it  as  before,   then 
bring  it  behind  the  centre  leaflet  and 
form  the  3rd  leaflet  like  the  2nd  at  the 
other  side. 

The  braid  is  continued  in  the  stem 
at  each  side  of  which  there  are  *  2  d  c 
worked  on  the  edge  of  the  loop,  4  ch 
I  d  c  into  the  picot,  4  ch  2  d  c  on  the 


other  side  of  the  loop  *,  repeat  around 

the  stem  and  all  round  each  of  the  3 

leaflets. 

The  Oval  Motif. 

Cut  off  7  inches  of  the  coarser 
braid.  Into  each  loop  at  each  side  of 
the  picot  put  1  tr  with  6  ch  between, 
for  14  loops,  form  the  braid  into  a  loop 
with  these  stitches  on  the  outside  of 
it,  cross  the  braid  and  secure  it.  Over 
each  6  ch  put  6  d  c,  9  ch  1  d  c  into  the 
d  c  between  the  loops  in  the  preceding 
row.  Into  each  9  ch  loop  1  d  c,  9  tr. 

Cross  over  behind  the  motif  and 
taking  up  apiece  of  Mignardise  braid 
join  with  a  d  c,  5  ch,  1  d  c  into  the  9th 
picot  on  the  braid,  1  d  c  into  1  d  c 
into  next  picot.  5  d  c  over  the  5  ch, 
7  ch,  1  d  c  into  the  d  c  after  the  9  tr  on 
the  centre,  *  9  ch  1  d  c  into  the  4th 
next  loop  on  the  braid,  1  d  c  into  next 
loop,  turn,  9  d  c  over  the  chs,  7  ch  1  d  c 
into  the  d  c  after  next  9  tr  on  the  cen- 
tre, *  repeat  all  round,  but  after  the 
4th  bar  miss  4  picots  on  the  braid 
instead  of  the  3  until  the  correspond- 
ing bars  are  reached  at  the  other  side, 
then  finish  as  at  the  beginning.  Sew 


74 


the  ends  of  the  braid  securely  behind 
the  centre  portion. 

1st  Outside  Row. — 2  d  c  into  1st  2 
picots  on  the  braid,  *  5  ch  1  d  c  into 
next  picot,  5  ch,  2  d  c  into  next  2 
picots  *  repeat  all  round. 

2nd  Row.—*  2  dc  into  top  of  1st 
loop,  2  dc  into  next  loop,  5  ch,  turn 
back  and  fasten  to  the  2nd  d  c.,  into 
this  loop  put  5  d  c,  1  d  c  into  the  2nd 
loop  in  the  1st  row,  5  ch  picot  4  of 
them,  1  ch,  *  repeat  into  next  loops. 

Work  the  3-iuch  stem  on  the 
coarser  braid  with  the  same  row  as  the 
1st  on  the  centre  at  both  sides  of  it. 

The  Edging. 

This  is  simply  the  1st  outside  row  of 


For    Pleated 

Net. 

the  oval  motif,  repeated  at  both  sides 
of  the  strip  of  coarser  braid  with  a 
heading  of  1  long  tr,  5  ch  into  each 
loop,  finish  with  a  row  of  5  d  c  into 
each  space. 

The  motifs  are  tacked  in  position 
on  the  net,  then  sewn  on  the  back  of 
the  work  with  fine  thread. 

A  Pleated  Net 
Design. 

Use  2  lengths  of  braid  at  the  same 
time.  Into  1st  braid  make  1  d  c, 
6  ch,  1  d  c  into  each  of  the  next  2 
loops,  turn  and  work  4  d  c  over  the 
6  ch,  then  3  ch  into  2nd  braid.  1  d  c, 
6  ch,  1  d  c  into  next  2  loops,  turn, 
4  d  c  over  the  6  ch,  3  ch,  to  1st  braid. 


A  PLEATED   NET  DESIGN. 


75 


Braid  Applique 
on  Net. 


Continue  in  this  way  till  the  corner 
is  reached,  then  from  the  1  d  c  in  top 
braid  carry  8  ch  to  lower  braid,  miss 
1  loop,  then  work  4  d  c  in  the  8  ch, 
from  the  4th  d  c  work  4  ch  back  to 
lower  braid,  miss  2  loops  and  join 
with  d  c,  work  4  d  c  over  this  4  ch, 
1  d  c  to  middle  of  8  ch,  4  ch  back 
again  to  lower  braid,  miss  2  loops  and 
return  with  4  d  c  to  centre  of  8  ch, 
3  ch  to  top  braid  and  continue  as 
before.  When  the  next  corner  is 
required  work  in  same  way  as  just 
directed,  but  this  time  making  the 


The  pleated  net  should  then  be 
tacked  to  the  depth  of  the  middle 
part  and  the  insertion  placed  in 
position  and  edges  sewn.  Afterwards 
place  upon  plain  net  and  sew  the 
other  side  of  the  insertion, 

A  Leaf  Spray 
for  Applique. 

This  suggestion  could  be  used  with 
or  without  the  crochet.  If  the  latter 
is  used  it  is  worked  as  the  braid  is 
twisted  in.  In  this  case,  begin  a  few 
loops  from  the  end  of  the  braid  :  1  dc 
into  each  of  3  loops,  2  ch  between 


A  LEAF  SPRAY  FOR  APPLIQUE. 

spray  of  3  bars  join  to  upper  instead 
of  lower  braid.  When  the  loops  of 
braid  are  reached,  curl  the  upper 
braid  to  size  of  oval  required  and 
work  the  stitches  going  into  upper 
braid  through  double  loops  at  the 
joins  to  hold  firmly. 

For  the  outer  edge  work  1  d  c  into 
every  loop  with  2  ch  between.  At 
corners  miss  3  loops  Round  the 
edge  of  the  ovals  work  2  tr  into  each 
loop  with  2  ch  between.  Have  the 
same  number  each  side. 


each  5  ch,  1  tr  into  the  next  15  loops, 
2  ch  between  each,  4  ch,  1  d  c  in  same 
loop  as  last  treble,  1  d  c  in  next  8 
loops,  2  ch  between  each,  miss  12 
loops  and  bend  round  for  middle 
leaf,  next  8  loops  1  d  c  2  ch  between 
each  4  ch,  1  tr  in  same  loop  as  last 
d  c,  then  1  tr  in  each  of  the  next 
2j2  loops,  with  2  ch  between  each, 
8  d  c,  miss  12  loops  and  work  3rd  leaf 
same  as  first.  Sew  these  in  position 
without  wrapping  more  than  possible, 
then  curl  round  the  braid  and  catch 


76 


A  POINT  WITH 
LACE   BKAID. 


down  to 
form  a 
little 
finish. 

For  the 
outer  edge 
work  d  c 

2  d c   into 
each    2    ch 
space,  5  ch  1  tr 
into   each    tr    of 
previous  row,  with 

3  ch   between   each. 
For    veins    work     a 

chain   from   one  of    the 
top  loops   to    one   of    the 
bottom  loops  of  the  leaf,  d  c 
along  3  loops,  work  5  ch  and 
join  into  the  5  ch  of  bar,  work 
over  the  remaining  ch  with  d  c's. 

For  the  stem,  from  leaf  work  about 
65  d  c  into  loops,  where  stem  twists 
catch  with  needle  and  cotton,  and 
proceed  with  second  set  of  leaves  in 
same  way  as  the  first. 
Attractive  Corners. 

In  the  two 
corners  worked 
with  a  fine 
Feather  -  stitch- 
ed Brai  d  ,  on 
pages  77  and  78, 
the  work  is  the 
same,  but  the 
braid  is  arran- 
ged somewhat 
differently. 

For  this  use 
Feather -stitch- 
ed Braid  of  the 
finest  quality, 
and  No.  50 
crochet  cotton. 
For  the  motif 
cut  off  a  length 
of  3-i  inches  of  A  NOVEL  CORNER  ARRANGEMENT. 


Corner 
Arrangements 

the   braid, 
turn     in 
the    ends 
neatly  and 
s  e  c  u  r  e 
with  a  few 
stitches, 
then  cut  a 
length     of 
2£    inches 
and     form    the 
cross,  the  triangle 
is    3|   inches    of    the 
braid    formed    into    the 
angle  in   the  centre.      Sew 
all  securely  together,  commen- 
cing at  the  edge  of  the    left 
arm  of  the  cross,  work  a  row 
of  d  c  into  the  openwork  on  the 
braid  and  continue  around   the   top 
down  to  the  opposite  point,  15  ch  to 
cross  the  end  of  the  arm,  1  d  c  into  the 
corner  of  the  underside,  make  five  5  ch 
loops  fastened  with  d  c  into  the  spaces 
on  this  side,  finish  the  side  with  d  c 
into  each  space,  work  a  corresponding 


77 


Braid  Applique 
on  Net. 


A   COKNEB  "WITH  CASH  8  BRAID. 

number  of  d  c  into  the  next  side  of 
the  triangle,  then  the  5  ch  loops  down 
to  the  end  of  this  strip,  cross  over  the 
end  with  15  ch  and  work  all  the  edges 
in  the  same  way,  after  fastening  the 
15  ch  over  the  end  of  the  left  arm, 
turn  and  put  *  4  tr,  4  long  tr,  4  triple  tr, 
4  long  tr,  4  tr,  then  into  each  5  ch  loop 
put  2  d  c  4  ch  2  d  c,  omitting  the  picot 
in  the  2  loops  at  the  end  of  each 
angle,  *  repeat  all  round. 

3rd  Row.—*  3  ch,  1  tr  1  ch  into  the 
space  between  the  trs  around  the  end, 
make  a  length  of  chs  sufficient  to  reach 
the  corner  of  the  triangle  and  repeat 
from  *. 

4th  Row. — 2  tr  over  every  1  ch 
between  the  trs,  work  d  c  closely  over 


the  ch  bars  with  a  5  ch  picot  after 
every  5th  dc. 

The  Corner  Design. 

Cut  off  the  length  of  braid  required 
and  form  the  angles  for  the  corners. 
These  are  sewn  into  shape. 

For  the  inner  side,  2  d  c  into  2  spaces 
on  the  edge  of  the  braid,  *  4  ch,  miss 
2  spaces,  2  d  c  into  next  2,  *  repeat  all 
round. 

2nd  Row. — Into  every  2nd  loop  put 
2  tr,  5  ch  between,  omit  the  chs  in  the 
corners. 

For  the  lower  side  of  the  top  strip  of 
braid,  work  the  1st  row  as  at  the  other 
side. 

2nd  Row. — Commencing  at  a  corner 
loop  in  the  preceding  row,  with  2  d  c 


78 


into  it,  5  ch  1  d  c  into  each  of  the  next 

2  loops,  3  ch  2  tr  into  next,  3  ch  2  long 
tr  into  next,  3  ch,  2  long  tr  into  next, 

3  ch  2  tr  into  next,  3  ch  2  d  c  into  next 

*  repeat. 

Work  the  lower  strip  of  braid  with 
the  1st  row  at  each  side  as  in  the 
upper. 

2nd  Row  on  the  Inner  Side. — Fasten 
the  thread  in  the  first  corner  loop 
with  a  d  c,  5  ch  1  d  c  into  next  loop, 

*  pass  over  3  loops,  15  ch  1   d  c  into 
next,  5  ch  1  d  c  into  each  of  next  3 
loops,  *  repeat. 

3rd  Row. — Id  c  into  the  top  of  the 
corner  loop,  *  10  ch  1  d  c  over  the 
centre  of  the  15  ch,  6  ch  1  d  c  beside 
the  last  d  c,  10  ch  1  d  c  into  next 
loop,  5  ch  1  d  c  into  each  of  next  2 
loops,  *  repeat. 

4th  Row. — 1  d  c  into  the  picot, 
10  ch,  fasten  this  with  a  d  c  to  the 
corner  of  the  first  strip  into  the 
second  of  the  2  d  c,  turn  back  on  the 
chs  and  put  12  d  c  over  them,  *  10  ch 
1  d  c  into  next  loop,  5  ch  1  d  c 
in-to  next,  10  ch  1  d  c  into  next 
picot,  6  ch 


The  Use  of 
Honiton  Braid. 

The  2nd,  3rd,  and  4th  rows  at  the 
outer  edge  are  worked  like  those  at 
the  opposite  side,  but  at  each  side  of 
a  corner  put  4  loops  in  the  group. 

5th  Row. — Into  each  5  ch  loop  put 
3  long  trs  into  each  picot  1  long  tr, 
5  ch,  1  long  tr,  5  ch,  1  triple  tr,  5  ch, 
1  triple  tr,  5  ch,  1  long  tr,  5  ch,  1 
long  tr.  At  each  side  of  a  corner 
there  are  2  loops  together,  into  each 
of  these  put  the  3  long  trs,  turn  and 
put  3  loops  of  5  ch  each,  fastened 
between  the  trs  with  a  d  c,  turn,  1  ch 
1  d  c  into  1st  loop,  5  ch  1  dc  into  each 
of  the  others,  1  ch  1  d  c  into  the  top 
of  the  tr,  then  put  the  long  trs  and 
chs  into  both  corner  picots. 

The  motif  and  lace  are  appliqued  on 
the  net  by  sewing  the  net  to  the  braid 
along  both  edges  on  the  wrong  side. 

A  Point  with  Lace 
Braid. 

This  shows  a  light  and  pretty 
idea  for  a  corner.  Here  two 
kinds  of  braid  are  used,  and 
very  little  stitchery  is  required. 

— i.ji  i    .   .    .  m  .     J    ,  '•  .UB        The  little 


INSEBTION  WITH  DIAMOND  DESIGN 
IN  MOSAIC   FILET  LACE. 


See  the  directions 
on  page  103. 


79 


Darned   HucKabacR. 

Darned    Huckaback    is    always  in  weaving,  is  picked  up  by  the  needle 

good  taste  for  towels.     The  work  is  following  the  outlines  of  the  pattern 

easy  to  do   and  inexpensive,  and  a  chosen  :  in  the  towel-end,  for  a  bold 

very    small     expenditure     of    labour  effect,    every   alternate    one    only   of 

suffices  to   produce,  from  a  piece  of  these  threads  was  lifted, 

huckaback  and  a  few  skeins  of  thread,  The  threftds  tQ  be  used  ^  lustrines 

notonlytowelsbutmanyotherarticles  suchasArdern's  Star  Sylko,  or  Vicar's 

that  call  for  ornamentation  that  will  "Brilliante,"  which  can  be  obtained  in 
stand  hard  wear. 

many  pretty  shades.     These  threads 

Huckaback  can  be  had  in  various  usually  come  in  3  sizes,  fine,  medium 

qualities;  some  of  it  is  of  "Old  Bleach"    '        and  coarse,  suited   for  fine,  medium 
linen,  and  beautifully  soft   to   work  and  coarse  "huck"  respectively.     For 

upon,  creamy  in  tint  and  rather  coarse  washing  articles,  boiling  dyes  should 

in     texture; 

that    known     iBHB^iii 
as 

and  which 
a  mixture 
linen    and 
cotton,    is   a 
purer  white, 
a  finer  mesh, 
and  for  cer- 
tain patterns 


su 
well 


^>K 

0      11      G    AA7    p     t"    C  r  -•"*>    ^    "^  *    -  "*•    "*        *   4T  _*.^  ».      :^    <*    *.'*.  "*.     ^  ^    i^V 


Hi  c  i  e  n  1 1  v     *+  >  X V^r  >  NVO  >  XXV*>  >  NV*0  >  "VvV*  >  x  xv^  >  ^^SS*  N 

3  y  *&  *¥  ^7  \^  ty -*¥  ^ 


You  will 
see  here  4 
different 
patterns  for 
darning  on 
huckaback, 

and    when       Figt  1l    A  TOWEL  IN  °REEK  FKET  DESIGN. 

you  realize  that  Fig.  2  is  a  detail  of  be  selected,  for  other  goods,  any  pre- 

the  towel  design  shown  in  Fig.  1,  you  ferred  colour  scheme  can  be  followed, 

will  understand  how  the  effect  varies  In  the  towel  in  Fig   l    the  threads 

according  to  the  texture  of  the  back-  are  all  taken  up  in  diagonal  succession, 

ground  material.  not  right  up  and   down   the   fabric. 

The  towel  being  of  rather  closely  For  the  longest  lines  of  this  Greek 
woven  huckaback,  was  worked  with  Fret  design  raise  10  threads  in  sue- 
longer  stitches  than  those  used  on  the  cession,  working  upwards  and  from 
small  detail.  Usually  every  one  of  right  to  left ;  pick  up  4,  passing 
the  raised  threads  that  are  the  down  again  as  if  tracing  an  inverted 
distinguishing  feature  in  huckaback  letter  V;  3  threads  still  downwards 

80 


but  from  left 
to     right; 

2  upwards, 
forming   a 
small    V;    2 
downwards, 
inside  that  V 
as  it  were  ;  3 
up,      follow- 
ing theouter 
left    hand 
slope  and 
towards    the 
right;      3 
downwards 
to  the  right, 
inside  the 
first   line   of 
10    stitches  ; 

3  down  and 

to  the  left ;  then ,  starti ug  1  loop  lower 
still,  begin  again  with  a  set  of  10  loops 
lifted.  Continue  thus  all  across  the 
work.  The  towel  is  worked  in  the 
same  way,  but  the  darning  is  under 
every  alternate  loop,  thus  enlarging 
the  pattern. 


Jfc.  , 

**jfJK+.        j»y» 


Simple 
Designs. 


jfilf 


Fig.  2.      THIS   SHOWS  THE   DETAIL   OF   TUE   TOWEL. 


M  f 


jr.  -r 


Fig    4.     A  PATTEKN  IN  BOLD  VANDYKES. 


81 


If  other  rows  are  needed  to  form  a 
wide  band  or  all-over  design,  these 
are  easily  arranged,  as  the  illustra- 
tions show,  and  dovetail  exactly  in 
with  one  another  and  with  the  first 
row  worked. 

The  towel  edge  is  embroidered  with 
scarlet ;     for 
^        the    detail 
deep  yellow, 
pale     green, 
bright    blue 
and    cop  - 
||§     pery  orange 
threads  were 
selected. 

Figure3isa 
little  design 
t||      that    was 
.V]      worked   in 
orange    and 
red;  any  pre- 
ferred    mix- 
ture could  be 
made  use  of, 
but       the 

C.N.      F 


Darned 
Huckaback. 


Fig.  3.      A   ZIG-ZAG  PATTERN. 

effect  will  be  so  different,  according 
to  the  tints  used,  as  to  surprise  those 
unfamiliar  with  the  work.  In  suit- 
ablecoloursthispattern  is  well  adapted 
for  small  articles. 

The  straight,  orange  threads  are 
laid  first,  and  are  in  plain  darning 
carried  along  every  alternate  row  of 
loops  on  the  huckaback,  and  passing 
under  every  one  of  these  loops. 
The  red  lines 
are  in  zig- 
zags and 
manage  d 
thus  :  raise  4 
loops  side  by 
side  just 
below  a  yel- 
1  o  w  line, 
bring  the 
thread  u*p 
and  to  the 
right,  under 
the  loop 
where  is  also 
a  }•  e  1  1  o  w 
strand;  still 
up  and  to  the 
right  and  the 
nearest  free 
loop  ;  under 
3  more  loops 
paralle  1 
and  going 


towards  the  left,  down  and  under  a 
loop  where  is  a  yellow  strand,  in  the 
same  direction  and  lift  the  loop  next 
to  the  left  of  the  4  first  loops  raised  ; 
this  is  the  first  loop  of  the  next  set 
of  4  that  begins  the  repeat  of  the  pat- 
tern. Continue  this  in  every  row, 
but  alternate  the  zig-zags  so  as  to  leave 
no  free  and  unraised  loops. 

Figure  4  is  also  in  bold  Vandykes, 
but  here  no  2  threads  pass  through  the 
same  loop.  Scarlet  and  pale  green 
were  the  tints  used  and  the  same  out- 
line was  followed  by  each  thread,  only 
the  stitches  were  so  set  that  those  ol 
one  row  exactly  alternated  with  and 
fitted  in  with  those  of  the  next/  Fom 
strands  were  raised  for  the  longest 
straight  stitch,  4  more  upward  and 
slanting  to  the  right,  4  down  again 
side  by  side  with  this  first  slant  and  so 
on  all  along.  This  for  the  scarlet 


82 


The  Uses  of  Darned 
Huckaback. 


rows;  in  the  green,  the  4  threads 
raised  came  at  the  top  and  the  slopes 
pointed  downwards  and  to  the  left. 

Figure  5  is  a  sample  of  more  elabor- 
Late  stitcher}*  that  gives  somewhat  the 
effect  of  brocade.  Blue  and  green  and 
blue  and  pink  were  employed  for  the 
interlacings  of  the  stripes,  with 
straighter  lines  of  black. bordered  with 
dull  gold.  Black  is  exceedingly  effec- 
tive, but  must  only  be  used  sparingly. 
In  this  pattern  the  black  thread  must 
be  finer  than  the  coloured,  as  a  double 
line  of  it  runs  through  the  same  sets 
of  loops.  Five  straight  stitches  are 
followed  by  one  raised  just  above  the 
line  (raised  by  one  black  strand)  and 
another  raised  just  below  the  line  and 
for  which  the  2ifd  black  strand  only 
is  emplo3'ed.  The  dull  gold  thread 
follows  the  outline  of  the  black,  but 
is  raised  to  one  strand  beyond  the 
centre  loop  of  the  5  straight  black 
stitches  ;  thus  vandyking  it  a  little. 
Between  the  rows  of  black  and  gold 
are  the  heart-shaped  lines  that  give 
one  into  the  other.  Seven  strands  or 


loops  are  raised  in  succession  for  the 
longest  lines,  and  the  thread  passes 
twice  through  the  4th  of  these  after 
completing  half  the  width  of  the  row 
that  it  is  working.  It  should  be 
noticed  that  the  bands  of  pattern  arc 
arranged  to  set  alternately,  as  this 
looks  far  better,  especially  on  account 
of  the  black  rows,  than  if  the}*  were 
placed  exactly  one  under  the  other. 

Other  patterns,  easy  and  elaborate, 
can  be  contrived  by  any  worker  who 
has  once  successfully  managed  one 
design. 

As  regards  its  uses,  Huckaback 
darning  is  adapted  for  use  on  towels, 
cushion-covers,  aprons,  work-bags, 
nightdress  cases  and  many  other 
articles.  Marking  can  be  effected  in 
this  manner  and  with  good  effect. 

Two  further  cautions  alone  are 
necessary:  use  a  blunt  needle  (a  rug 
needle)  and  do  not  let  any  stitches  be 
seen  on  the  wrong  side  of  the  work. 
Begin  and  fasten  off  invisibly  under 
the  stitches  that  are  over  the  right  side 
of  the  huckaback. 


A  border  for  a  Tablecloth,  made  by  darning  filet  crochet,  open  mesh. 
The  edge  is  finished  \vith  loops  and  double  crochet. 

83 


Finishing  the   Edges    of 
Cushions. 


We  have  all  made 
cushions,  and  we  have 
all  finished  them  off  in 
the  ordinary  way,  with  a 
frill  or  a  cord,  and  prob- 
ably we  have  wished  we 
knew  of  some  other  way 
we  could  finish  them 
for  a  change.  There 
are  quite  a  lot  of 
other  ways.  A  few 
are  shown  and  des- 
cribed here,  and  as 
you  will  easily  see, 
they  can  all  be 
enlarged  and  improved  upon,  and 
you  will  doubtless  think  of  a  good 
many  more  things  that  you  can  do 
with  the 


covers. 

First  of 
all,    and 

probably  one  of  the  most  beautiful, 
is  the  cushion  cover  with  the 
fringed  ends  shown.  The  sides 
are  finished  with  a  little  fancy 
stitching  that  completely  covers 
the  seams,  and  the  ends  are  fringed 
by  unravelling  the  weft  of  the  linen 


An  edge  of  this  kinl  makes  a  good   finish. 


A  very  simple  stitch  in  embroidery  silk. 

and  knotting  the  warp.  This  makes 
a  beautiful  setting  for  the  handsome 
piece  of  embroidery.  A  working 
detail,  showing  how  to  start  the 
fringe,  is 
shown , 
and  full 
dire  c  - 
tions  as 
to  how  to 
make 

fringes  appear  on  another  page  in 
this  volume.  This  is  quite  one  of 
the  simplest  of  fringes,  and  yet  most 
effective. 

vSome  very  attractive  finishings  may 
be  obtained  by  the  use  of  embroidery 
stitches,  using  several  strands  of 
embroidery  silk,  and 
employing  quite  simple 
stitchery.  The  three 
examples  shown  would 
be  quite  easy  to  work, 
and  the  additiojj  of  a 
tassel  at  the  corner  is  in 
good  taste.  These  are 
all  shown  with  the  edges 
opened  flat,  that  it  may 
be  more  easilv  scon  how 


This  quite  hides  the  seam,  and   is  most  effective. 

84 


Crochet 
Finishes. 

shown  on  the  canvas 
specimen,  fold  over 
the  raw  edge,  work 
d  c  round  the  edge, 
putting  them  close 
together  at  the  corner. 

2nd    Row.—*    2    tr 


A  crochet  finish  with  the  two 
edges  laced  together. 

they  are  worked.  These 
stitches  of  course  quite  cover 
the  seams. 

Again,  crochet  can  be  success- 
fully employed  for  this  purpose. 
In  the  crochet  specimens  two 
patterns  are  illustrated,  each 
of  which  is  shown  opened  flat 
and  also  closed.  Where  a 
cushion  cover  is  of  canvas,  a 
crocheted  edge  of  the  same 
colour  as  the  work  on  the 
cushion  is  most  suitable.  A 


1 


• 


TMs  shows  tha  abov 
finiBh  with  the  twj 
edges  opened  flat. 


into  d  c,  2  ch,  miss 
1  d  c.  Repeat  from  *. 
No  d  c's  are  to  be 
missed  at  the  corners. 
When  the  crochet  is 
finished,  lace  the 
edges  together. 

A  great  ad  van  tage  of 
this  simple  lacing  is 
that  it  can  easily  be 


A  good  edge  for  a  Canvas 
Cushion  Cover. 


little  finish  is  crocheted 
on  all  the  sides,  and 
the  crochet  edges  are 
then  laced  together 
either  with  very  fine 
cord  or  a  length  of 
chain. 

To  make   the   edge 


m 


A  coT*r  of  the  design  above  with  the  edges  laced. 
85 


Finishing  the  Edges 
of  Cushions. 


undone,  and 
the  cushion 
slipped  out 
for  the  covet- 
to  be  laun- 
dered, no 
further  fas- 
tening being 
necessary. 

The  other 
crochet  edg- 
ing is  co  m  - 
me  need  by 
turning  in 
the  edge  and 
working  buttonhole  stitch  all  round, 
making  the  work  -  closer  at  the 
fcorners. 

1st  Roiv.— *  1  d  c  in  each  of  first 
4  buttonhole  stitches,  4  ch,  1  long  tr 
in  each  of  2  next  stitches.  4  ch. 


Commencing  the  Fringe 
the-  design    below. 


Repeat  from 

2nd  Row.— 
Into  1st  space 
made  by  long 
tr  and  ch  of 
previous  row, 
put  *  1  long 
tr,  3  ch,  1  tr, 
miss  the  next 
space,  and 
into  the  next 
put  1  tr,  3  ch, 
1  long  t  r  . 
for  Repeat  from 

*.     Then   lace 
the  edges  together. 

The  fancy  edge  on  the  inner  side 
is  made  by  catching  each  button- 
holed thread  and  working  into  each 
stitch  like  one  side  of  ordinary 
feather-stitching. 


A  Handsome  Cushion.      The  side  seams  are  hidden  by   the 
embroidery  stitching,  and  the  ends  are  fringed. 


Rhodes  Embroidery. 


This  work 
so  called 
:ause     it 
a  revival 
f  some  old 
-reek 
ork, done 
y     the 
easants  of 
Rhodes 
.land,     of 
h  i   c   h 
oine    very 
beautiful 
specimens 
in   a  y    b  e 
seen  in  the 
Victoria 
and  Albert 
Museum.     In  this  work,  however,  the 
effect  is  produced  by  the  threads  being 
drawn  out,  but  no  difficulty  caused  by 
the  drawing  of  threads  presents  itself 
to    the    modern    worker    of    Rhodes 
Kmbroidery.     The  threads  are  simply 

Fig.     1. 


SHOWING  THK   WOBK  BEING  DONE. 


A         1  '2          3          4          5          6        A 

B      7       8       9      10     11      12     B 
C      13     14      15     16     17      18     C 


^-•iTc-si  fore  e  d 
f  apart  with 

vjjiM  a  v  e  r  y 
coarse 
needle, 
and  then 

Ci-  ,  i 

^HK      i)  o  u  11  d 
.f         with     a 
pp-       s t  r  o  n  g 
linen 
PHI       thread. 

/^        Materials 
Required. 

The     re- 

;  :  q  u  i  s  i  t  e  s 
necessary 
for  this 
w  ork  are 
the  design, 
which  can  be  obtained  ready  stamped 
on  the  material  for  working,  an 
embroider}-  needle  for  outlining  the 
design ,  embroidery  cotton ,  a 
"Rhodes"  needle,  for  punching  the 
holes  and  binding  the  threads,  and 

With    "Rhodes"    Needle    under 
and  out  at  7. 


Fig.    2. 


D 

C 

13 

B 

7 

A 

1 

D 

E 

14 

8 

2 

E 

15 

9 

3 

16 

10 

4 

17 

11 

5 

18 

12 

6 

C 

B 

A 

TO          1         OUT  AT 

7 

1 

8 

M                               2                                      ,, 

8 

2 

9 

> 

3 

9 

3 

10 

- 

•* 
4 

10 
11 

te 
bd 

5 

11 

5 

12 

6 

12   j 

6                 „ 

18 

12                   >r 

18 

12 

17 

AND    SO    ON 


87 


A  DESIGN  FOB  A  TEA  COSY   IN 
HHODE8  EMBBOIDEBY. 


Rhodes 
Embroidery. 

some 
strong  p|Jj 
linen 
thread 
for  this 
part  of 
the  work. 

Method 

of 

Working. 

The  first 
step  is  to 
outline 
the  de- 
sign, and 
obviously 
the  larger  the  design  is,  the  less  space 
there  is  to  be  taken  up  by  the  open- 
work in  the  background.  This  out- 
lining is  done  with  the  embroidery 
cotton,  and  is  a  perfectly  simple 
matter. 

Now  for  the  openwork,  tie  an  end 
of  linen  thread  into  the  eye  of  a 
"Rhodes"  needle,  and  bring  it  from 
the  wrong,  through  the  right  side  of 
the  work  at  the  1st  dot  in  the  2nd 
row — or  dot  7  on  the  diagram  ;  push  it 
through  to  the  wrong  side  on  the  dot 
immediately  above  (dot  1).  Bring  it 
up  at  the  2nd  dot  of  the  2nd  row  (dot  8) . 
Then  push  it  down  again  at  the  2nd 
dot  of  the  1st  row  (dot  2)  and  up  on 
the  3rd  dot  of  the  2nd  row  (dot  9). 


Follow- 
ing these 
instruc- 
t  i  o  n  s 
with  the 
diagram, 
it  will 
be  see  n 
that  the 
nieth  od 
is  one 
stitch  on 
t  h  e  per- 

,,^^^^^^_  peudicu- 
lar  and 
onestitch 

on  the  diagonal,  the  first  of  these 
ties  the  fabric  threads,  the  second 
brings  the  needle  in  position  for 
the  next  stitch.  When  the  end  of 
a  row  of  dots  is  reached,  start  the  row 
below.  After  tying  the  threads  at  dot 
12,  the  needle  put  in  at  dot  6  is  brought 
out  at  dot  18,  and  is  thus  in  position 
for  the  next  stitch.  It  is  then  put  in 
at  12  and  out  at  18,  again  tying  the 
threads,  then  in  at  12  and  out  at  17, 
and  so  on. 

When  all  is  worked  in  this  manner 
from  A  A  to  C  C,  reverse  the  material 
as  in  Fig.  2,  and  repeat  the  instruc- 
tions working  from  D  E  to  D  E. 

There  is  really  not  the  slightest 
difficulty  about  this  work,  merely  a 


RHODES  EMBROIDF.nY  A8  A  BORDEB. 


Elaborate 
Patterns. 


";'0-'4^ 


AN   EXCEEDINOLY   HANDSOME   DESIGN 
IN  UHODES  EMBROIDERY. 

little  care  being  required  to  see  that 

while  the  stitches  are  pulled  firmly, 

they  are  not  drawn  so  as  to  pucker 

the  material.     Cluny  lace  makes  an 

•excellent  finish  for  this  kind  of  work, 

which   is 

sometimes 

•called 

Punched 

K  in  b  r  o  i  - 

-der  y . 

Where 
to  Get 
Materials. 

All  t  h  e 
req  uisites 
for  this 
work  c  a  11 
be  obtained 
fro  m  the 
E  r  o  d  e  r  i  e 
Russe  Co., 
289,  Re- 
gent St., 
TV  o  n  d  o  n  , 
W. 


A   HO  UNI)   FIVE   O'CLOCK   TEA   CLOTH 
IN    RHODES   EMBROIDERY. 


They  are  the  sole  Patentees  for  this 
embroidery,  and  all  the  illustrations 
on  these  pages  are  their  copyright, 
and  can  be  obtained  from  them. 
They  have  other  beautiful  designs 
traced  on 
a  large 
number  of 
art  icl  es, 
including 
d  '  o  i  1  i  e  s  , 
tray  cloths, 
tea  cloths 
,c  o  s  i  e  s  , 
nightdress 
cases,  chair 
backs,  etc., 
and  they 
will  com- 
m  e  n  c  e  a 
piece  of 
work  if 
required. 
No  one 
need  be 
afraid  to 


Rhodes 
Embroidery. 


attempt  this  embroidery,  and  quite 
a  small  square  can  be  purchased 
to  experiment  on.  Rhodes  em- 
broidery is  so  fascinating  to  do, 
however,  that  the  worker  will  soon 
want  to  start  something  more  ambi- 


tious. It  would  be  advisable  for 
beginners  not  to  start  with  a  circle  or 
curved  piece  of  material,  something 
having  a  squared  edge  would  be  easier 
as  a  commencement,  until  proficiency 
is  attained. 


The  Mending  Basket. 


Mending  and  altering  are  two 
branches  of  the  great  art  of  Needle- 
craft  which  no  woman  can  afford  to 
despise  in  these  days  of  ready-made 
frocks  and  shop-bought  costumes. 
Turnings  may  be  insufficient,  buttons 
sewn  on  with  too  scant  stitches, 
hooks  and  eyes  trembing  to  fall  off, 
but  these  deficiencies  very  easily  can 
be  put  to  rights.  A  shop-bought 
costume  that  does  not  fit,  however, 
is  not  cheap  at  any  price.  I/earn, 
therefore,  how  to  make  alterations  in 
the  most  commonsense  and  practical 
fashion, and  take preventivemeasures. 
before  the  garment  is  worn  for  the 
first  time,  to  overcome  the  little 
deficiencies  that  we  may  expect  to 
discover  in  the  "  ready-mades." 

Tools  for  the   Practical 
Needlewoman. 

Chief  among  the  aids  for  the 
practical  needlewoman,  taking  first 
rank  among  her  valuable  assistants, 
comes  the  sewing-machine.  For  hard 
wear  and  every-day  use  machine- 
stitching  is  generally  much  neater 
and  stronger  than  hand  sewing,  and 
the  pace,  of  course,  is  far  quicker. 
Her  sewing-machine  is  a  good  friend 
to  the  busy  woman  who  has  mo?t 
need  to  practise  the  art  of  preventive 
mending,  for  strength  and  speed  are 
two  of  her  chief  demands. 

It  pays  to  understand  one's  sewing- 
machine,  and  to  treat  it  with  tender 


care.  Rough  usage,  or  careless 
handling,  through  ignorance  of  the 
rightful  functions  of  the  different 
delicate  pieces,  may  lead  to  dire 
disaster.  A  handbook  of  instructions- 
is  always  given  when  the  machine  is- 
purchased  ;  cherish  this  book,  for  if 
it  is  mislaid  you  are  at  sea  without 
your  chart.  The  inexperienced  girl 
who  makes  her  early  attempt  to- 
fathom  the  mysteries  of  the  sewing- 
machine  will  find  that  a  little  personal 
instruction  (which  may  be  had  at  the 
depot  of  her  own  make  of  machine} 
will  be  more  helpful  than  an  hour 
spent  in  trying  to  solve  intricate 
problems  by  the  aid  of  the  printed, 
page.  Later  on,  however,  the  printed 
directions  will  read  lucidly  enough 
when  her  mind  is  conversant  with  the 
everyday  workings  of  the  machine, 
and  an  intelligent  glance  at  her 
useful  little  handbook  will  disclose  to 
her  the  cause  and  the  remedy  of  the 
defective  action. 

Keep  the  machine  scrupulously 
clean  and  thoroughly  well  oiled.  To- 
do  this  is  again  to  recognise  the 
wisdom  of  preventive  measures.  An 
un-oiled,  dirty  machine  will  al ways- 
cause  trouble  in  working,  for  when 
the  parts  do  not  run  smoothly, 
dropped  and  uneven  stitches  are  a 
frequent  embarrassment. 

Oil  in  every  part,  and  open  and! 
turn  back  so  that  when  the  oil  has- 


90 


soaked  through,  the  clogged  dirt  may 
be  carefully  cleaned  away. 

A  capacious  mending 
basket  is  a  necessity  for  the 
practical  worker,  and  it  is  all 
the  more  convenient  if  it 
stands  upon  legs.tableheight, 
and  can  be  carried  about  to 
be  stationed  just  within 
comfortable  reach  of  the 
mender's  right  hand. 

Keep  always  some  tailor's 
canvas  for  use  as  stiffening, 
buckram  for  millinery,  white 
leno  and  fine  black  lining, 
rolls  of  old  linen  and  flannel 
for  patching,  stray  pieces  of 
lace,  and  left-over  lengths  of  embroi- 
dery or  insertions.  Roll  up  all  odd- 
ments in  soft,  clean  muslin  with  tape 
or  label  attached,  on  which  is  written 
a  list  of  the  trifles  to  be  found  within 
your  treasury. 

If  you  frequently  find  your  tape 
measure  mislaid,  try  this  plan,  and 
thus  prevent  the  long  searching  that 
interrupts  your  sewing.  Cut  as  long 
a  piece  off  your  tape  as  will  stretch 
from  end  to  end  of  your  machine, 
and  paste  it  along  the  front  edge  of 
the  stand.  It  thus  will  be  always  at 
hand  when  required,  and  will  serve 
at  any  rate  for  all  the  shorter  measure- 
ments required. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  assemble  your 
hooks  and  eyes  on  safety  pins.     Slip 
the  opened  pin  through  the  separate 
hooks     and     eyes, 
then     when     they 
are    all   securely 
dangling,   fi  r  m  1  y 
close    your    safety 
pin,  and  they  are 
ready     for    use 
when      needed 
and    will    not    get 


DIAGRAM  SHOWING 
HOW  TO  MEXD  A 
CHEMISE  SLEEVE- 


A.    SIMPLE    WA?    TO    RENOVATE    KNICKERS 
WHEN   THE   FRILLS   HAVE  WORK   OUT, 

91 


Necessary 
Implements. 

tangled  and  twisted  together  as  so- 
often  happens  if  they  are  kept  in  a 
box. 

Keep  odd  buttons  in  glass 
bottles.  No  more  hunting  in 
the  dark  and  dust  !  Yon  can 
see  the  button  for  which  you 
are  searching,  and  by  shaking 
the  bottle  can  bring  it  near  to 
the  top,  where  it  can  be  easily 
reached.  Bone  or  pearl  but- 
tons for  underwear,  or  any 
others  that  are  not  affected 
by  exposure,  may  be  securely 
fixed  upon  a  hairpin.  Straigh- 
ten out  one  of  the  long  hai  rpins, 
bend  back  one  end  about  a 
quarter  or  half  an  inch,  run  the 
point  through  the  holes,  and  when 
your  buttons  are  neatly  crowded 
together  turn  up  the  other  end  to 
hold  them  securely. 

Preventive 
Mending. 

We  have  heard  that  in  China  it  is- 
the  custom  to  pay  the  family  doctor 
to  keep  his  patients  in  good  health 
rather  than  to  call  him  in  only  after 
illness  has  laid  the  sufferer  low. 
Many  of  us  applaud  this  system,  but 
have  neither  the  opportunity  nor, 
perhaps,  the  courage,  to  defy  conven- 
tions in  our  own  country. 

But  why  not  pursue  the  same  wise 
course   in    dealing    with    household 
mending  ?     It  works  admirably. 
Take    the    proverbial    stitch    that 
"saves     nine"     in 
very     good     time, 
even   before   there 
is  any    apparent 
need    for    it,    and 
you'll  find  it  will 
work  miracles. 

Stockings,     for 
instance.   The  toes 


The  Mending 
Basket. 


* 


THE  JOY  OP  THE  HOUSEWIFE  WHEN  SHE 
EXAMINES  THE  LAUNDBY  HAMPER  I 


and  heels  of  children's  stockings  may 
be  neatly  darned  before  they  are  worn 
for  the  first  time,  for  this  purpose 
using  crochet  silk  or  mercerised 
thread,  which  is  less  bulky  and  clumsy 
than  wool.  Insist  on  frequent  change 
of  hosiery  and  forbid  the  wearing  of 
any  stocking  that  shows  even  the 
tiniest  hole.  To  prevent  those  long 
running  ladders  which  are  almost 
impossible  to  mend,  sew  a  band  of 
silk  or  cotton,  or  a  border  cut  from  an 
old  stocking,  round  each  hem  of  the 
new  pair.  Hose  supporters  (chief 
cause  of  these  destructive  ladders)  will 
seldom  cut  through  this  double  band. 
Or  another  excellent  plan  may  be 
adopted.  Take  a  round  brass  ring 
and  d  c  closely  over  it  to  make  a  soft, 
firm  covering.  Sew  this  firmly  into 
position  upon  the  stocking  top  with 
neat,  strong  stitches,  and  always  insert 
the  clip  of  the  suspender  within  this 
ring.  You  will  thus  make  it  impos- 
sible for  the  tension  to  strain  the 
stocking  beyond  the  area  enclosed  by 
the  ring. 

In  the  knees  of  children's  stockings 
small  shields  may  be  placed,  pieces 


cut  from  other  stockings  and  fastened 
in  so  neatly  that  they  are  quite  incon- 
spicuous and  not  at  all  uncomfortable. 

To  strengthen  the  heel  and  under- 
part  of  the  foot  when  making  men's 
or  boy's  stockings,  knit  stout  mercer- 
ised cotton  along  with  the  wool.  This 
does  not  make  it  so  clumsy  as  2  strands 
of  wool,  yet  it  adds  considerably  to  the 
wearing  quality  of  the  stocking. 

The  "ready-uiades,"  whether  visit- 
ing frocks,  walking  suits,  or  under- 
wear, as  was  hinted  in  a  previous  para- 
graph, cry  out  loudly  for  preventive 
mending.  For  instance,  sleeves  should 
be  stitched  in  by  machine,  for  on 
ready-made  clothes  the  machine 
stitching  is  not  always  carefully  done, 
and  a  weak  place  in  the  sleeve  seam 
will  quickly  give  way  under  strain 
and  start  an  ugly  tear. 

Embroidery  with  scalloped  or 
pointed  edging  should  be  machined 
strongly  all  round  the  extreme  edges, 
the  machine  needle  patiently  follow- 
ing the  circuitous  course  of  the  pat- 
tern. This  will  double  the  life  of 
embroided  lace,  preventing  frayed 
untidiness  and  breaks,  gaps  and  tears. 


CASH'S  INSEIITIOX8   AUK    ADMIRABLE 
roil  MENDING   TKAY-CLOTHS 


92 


Tray  Cloth 
Suggestions. 


To  prevent  aii  embroidery  flounce 
from  ragging  out  before  the  petticoat 
itself  is  any  the  worse  for  wear,  neatly 
hem  the  edge  as  soon  as  it  threatens 
to  fray  or  gets  torn  by  an  accidental 
mis-step,  and  add  a  bordering  of 
Valenciennes  or  fine  Torchon  lace. 

Buttons  should  receive  careful 
attention  when  any  ready-made  gar- 
ment is  bought.  The  trimness  of 
effect  and  the  general  prettiness  of 
coat  or  costume  may  be  entirely  spoilt 
if  one  of  a  set  of  distinctive  buttons 
is  allowed  to  drop  off  and  get  lost. 

Therefore  sew  on  all  buttons  at  the 
time  of  your  pur- 
chase. vStitch  care- 
fully with  a  strong 
thread  ;  when  you 
have  sewn  through 
and  through  the 
button  half  a  dozen 
times,  wind  your 
thread  round  and 
round  the  strands 
which  hold  the 
button,  between 
the  button  and  the 
cloth,  m  a  k  i  n  g  a 
sort  of  shank. 
Treat  boot  and  shoe 
buttons  in  the 


AN   ECONOMICAL  TRAY-CLOTH 
MADE  FROM  SCRAPS. 


«.!!:•  j$"     •"•"'sfj"     ?Y  -MI.I 

=S$*i^ 


MACHINE-MADE   NET    SQUA11KB 
FOR  MENDING  TEA  CLOTHS. 


same       way. 

It  is  wise  to 
strengthen  bed- 
linen  with  broad 
tape  laid  on  at  the 
corners,  inconspic- 
uously stitched 
into  position,  so 
that  an  added  firm- 
ness is  given  to  the 
sheets  where  the 
clothes-pegs  might 
do  most  damage. 

Tablecloths  are 
wonderfully 
strengthened  if 
tape  is  sewn  all 
sides.  This  is  the 


\    NARROW   CKOCHET    INSERTION   IS    USEFTTL 
IX   REPAIRING    TORN    HEMSTITCHING. 


down    the   long 
part  that  goes  first. 

Look  closely  into  the  wool-worked 
buttonholing  at  your  blanket  ends. 
You  may,  with  advantage,  stitch  fresh 
buttonhole  edgings  that  will  keep  the 
neat  turn-over,  when  the  blanket  is 
in  use,  for  a  longer  time  than  if  the 
shop-bough  t  edging  were  left  to  suffice. 

Mending  a  Child's 
Chemise. 

Half  an  hour  spent  weekly  in  pre- 
ventive mending  will  often  save  hours 
of  darning  and  patching  later.  At  the 


93 


A  CHILD'S   PKTTICOAT 
DOXK-WITH   STOCKING 


missing.     Now 


The  Mending 
Basket. 

same  time,  there  will  always  be  holes 
and  tears,  and  it  is  well  to  learn  the 
best  methods  of  repairing  the  various 
damages. 

As  c  hi  Id  r  e  11  '  s 
clothes  quick!}'  and 
so  often  require 
mending,  shall  we 
consider  the  repair- 
ing of  a  little  girl's 
chemise  ?  These 
directions  are  suit- 
able for  a  chemise 
with  a  round  band. 
The  first  thing  to 
happen  will  most 
likely  be  its 
return  f  r  o  m  the 
wash  with  a  button 
don't  hastily  catch  one  on,  or  you 
will  have  the  same  business  to  do 
next  week.  First  be  sure  that  your 
button  is  the  right  size  for  your 
button  hole.  One  too  large  would  be 
obviously  useless,  one  too  small  will 
come  unfastened  and  cause  dis- 
comfort. The  plain  linen  buttons 
are  preferable,  those  with  holes  cut 
the  cotton  and  cause  the  threads  to 
come  undone.  Sew  on  firmly,  stem- 
ming, i.e.,  twist  the  cotton  several 
times  round  the  button,  and  cast  off 
securely  on  the  back. 

The  next  trouble  will  probably  be 
a  slit  down  the  front  from  the  open- 
ing ;  this  will  possibly  be  very  slight, 
but  a  darn  is  not  a  sufficient  form  of 
strengthening.  Place  a  piece  of  wide 
tape  across  the  slit,  on  the  wrong 
side  of  the  garment,  and  sew  round 
securely.  Some  find  a  piece  of  tape 
on  both  sides  acts  well  for  hard  wear, 
but  this  would  be  too  clumsy  for 
light  garments. 

A  chemise  that  is  in  otherwise 
good  condition  may  perhaps  become 


MADE    FHOM 
LEGS. 


slightly  frayed  at  the  bottom.  This 
is  easily  made  perfect  by  cutting  off 
the  bottom  hem,  turning  up  and 
machining  another. 
Do  not  tear  off  this 
hem,  but  cut  it  off, 
as  the  threads  round 
the  bottom  of  the 
chemise  do  not 
always  run  evenly. 

The  sleeve  is  a 
part  that  constantly 
comes  to  grief 
with  growing  girls. 
Physical  drill  , 
hockey,  etc.,  while 
giving  good  exer- 
cise to  the  arms, 
also  causes  much  wear  on  the  parts 
of  the  chemise  round  the  shoulder. 
Patching  here  is  very  unsatisfactory, 
for  if  you  patcli  one  side  one  week 
the  other  will  need  it  the  next,  and 
the  top  the  next  after,  making  a 
very  unsightly  and  uncomfortable 
garment.  The  remedy  for  this  is  to 
put  in  an  entirely  new  sleeve,  which 
is  very  easily  done. 

Take  an  oblong  piece  of  material, 
fold  to  form  a  square,  place  the  fold 
over  the  shoulder  part  of  sleeve, 
having  'first  unpicked  the  neck  band 
over  the  shoulder.  One  end  of 
square  goes  into  the  band.  (A  in 
diagram).  This  may  be  cut  out  a 
little  if  necessary;  the  other  side  of 
the  square  conies  to  the  arm-hole  of 
sleeve.  Pin  new  material  on  to  the 
old  sleeve,  cut  out  the  curve  under 
arm  by  the  old  pattern,  make  a  seam 
and  fell  on  that  curve  to  correspond 
with  the  side  of  chemise.  (U  in 
diagram).  Sew  round  the  right  side 
of  the  patcli,  being  particular  that 
the  seam  and  fell  of  the  new  sleeve 
come  exactly  on  the  seam  and  fell  of 


94 


About  Table 
Linen. 


the  chemise.  Now  turn  the  chemise 
inside  out  and  cut  out  the  old  sleeve, 
leaving  enough  material  to  turn  in 
and  make  a  neat  hem  all  round.  Sew 
•on  the  part  of  the  band  that  was 
unpicked,  hem  the  arm-hole. 

Possibly  by  this  time  the  neck  band 
is  wearing.  Never  patch  a  band,  it 
is  lumpy  and  looks  most  ugly.  This 
should  be  taken  off  and  a  new  band 
put  on.  The  band  is  simply  a  long 
narrow  strip  of  calico.  Measure  the 
length  by  the  old  one,  halve  and 
quarter  this  baud,  see  that  the  half 
comes  to  the  middle  of  the  back 
gathers  and  the  quarters  on  the 
shoulders  ;  pin  these  points  while 
you  tack  the  band,  it  can  then  be 
machined.  Work  a  buttonhole,  put 
on  a  button  and  finish  with  trimming. 
If  the  trimming  on  the  original  band 
was  good  it  should  bear  using  again  ; 
if  it  is  worn,  put  on  some  narrow 
Cash's  Frilling  or  crocheted  edging. 

Often  it  happens  that  the  top  back 
of  the  chemise  is  much  worn  ;  in  this 
case  a  neat  patch  might  be  put  in 
while  the  baud  is  off.  Press  out  the 
old  gathers  before  placing  the. patch  ; 
remember  to  gather  the  back  when 
the  patch  has  been  completed  before 
replacing  the  baud.  If  the  two  new 
sleeves  are  put  in  at  the  same  time 
the  chemise  will  take  an  entirely  new 
lease  of  life. 
A  Simple  Knicker  Frill. 

Unfortunately,  by  far  the  larger 
part  of  our  mending,  nowadays,  is 
due  to  the  modern  laundry.  Where 
our  mothers  could  keep  their  under- 
clothing in  good  condition  for  years, 
ours  is  torn  to  shreds,  and  some  of  it 
comes  home  ragged  and  tattered  most 
weeks  from  the  average  laundry. 
Knicker  frills  go  very  quickly,  and 
often  need  replacing. 


Here  is  a  simple  way  to  renovate 
them.  Crochet  a  band  of  insertion, 
and  add  a  crochet  frill ;  gather  the 
leg  of  the  knicker,  and  whip  it  to 
one  edge  of  the  band  of  insertion. 
You  will  find  this  will  wear  well,  and 
look  better  than  patched  embroidery. 

Mending  Table 
Linen. 

The  damage  here  is  chiefly  of  two 
sorts  ;  thin  places  where  the  laundry 
has  removed  stains — always  without 
chemicals  of  course  !— and  perhaps  a 
little  hole  in  the  middle,  and  clean 
knife  cuts.  The  latter  should  be 
darned  at  once,  whether  it  crumples 
the  cloth  or  not,  while  other  darns 
are  usually  left  till  the  cloth  is  ready 
for  the  wash. 

To  darn  a  cut,  first  catch  its  edges 
lightly  together  with  coloured  cotton, 
so  that  it  lies  quite  flat  and  closed. 
Then  thread  a  crewel  needle  with 
medium  course  linen  thread  for  a 
tablecloth,  or  with  fine  thread  for  a 
fine  d'oily.  The  shape  of  the  darn 
will  be  a  parallelogram,  the  sides 
slanting  according  to  the  direction 
of  the  cut,  but  the  stitches  always 
exactly  in  line  with  the  selvedge  of 
the  material.  When  the  darn  is  com- 
pleted to  about  half-an-inch  beyond 
each  end  of  the  cut  that  is  sufficient, 
and  you  have  then  only  to  remove 
the  coloured  cotton. 

A  round  hole  or  thin  place  is 
darned  just  as  a  stocking-hole,  but 
you  must  be  more  careful  than  ever 
that  the  crossing  threads  do  not  go 
through  the  material,  but  only  pick 
up  the  first  darning  threads,  and  see 
that  you  do  pick  up  the  threads 
entirely  without  splitting  them. 

When  table-cloths  get  worn  or 
frayed,  or  in  any  way  damaged  at  the 
edges,  it  may  be  possible  to  mend  and 


95 


The  Mending 
Basket. 


darn  aud  even  patch  the  edges  for  a 
little  while;  but  the  most  satisfactory 
way  in  the  end  is  to  cut  the  edges 
right  off  and  turn  down  a  hem.  The 
cloth  will  then  take  on  a  new  lease 
of  life. 
Tray-cloths. 

Speaking  of  the  ravages  of  the 
laundry,  reminds  me  of  the  way 
tray-qloths  and  fancy  tea-cloths  get 
torn  if  there  is  any  drawn-thread 
work  or  hei-n-stitchiug.  Most  house- 
wives have  had  occasion  to  mourn 
damages  such  as  the  one  illustrated 
on  page  92.  Now  a  quick  way  to 
repair  hemstitching  or  narrow  drawn- 
thread  work,  when  it  runs  all  round 
the  cloth,  is  to  pu*t  some  of  Cash's 
insertion  over  the  damaged  line, 
carrying  it  right  out  to  the  edge  of 
the  cloth,  since  it  is  a  little  diffi- 
cult to  make  neat  at  the  corners ; 
featherstitch  down  each  side  of  the 
insertion.  Or  a  narrow  insertion  can 
be  crocheted.  The  specimen  shown  is 
simply  loops  of  5  ch,  each  row  caught 
into  the  row  below.  This  does  well 
to  go  with  a  firm  material. 

When  fancy  corners  get  torn  out,  a 
square  of  fine  crocheted  filet  mesh 
can  be  let  in,  and  the  material  cut 
away  to  fit.  If  the  cloth  is  too  thin 
to  take  anything  as  strong  as  crochet, 
a  piece  of  darned  net  let  in  will  often 
look  well,  and  give  the  cloth  a  new 
lease  of  life.  Also,  you  can  get  from 
Messrs.  S.  Peach  &  Co.,  The  Looms, 
Nottingham,  small  squares  in  fine 
machine-made  net,  that  are  not  so 
heavy  as  crochet  for  letting  into  a 
cloth  that  is  partly  worn.  And  these 
are  quite  inexpensive  ;  they  are  about 
5  inches  square.  (See  illustration  on 
page  93). 
**  Hedge  -tear  "  in  a  Dress. 

This  is  unfortunately  as  common 


as  it  is  annoying,  and  not  so  very  easy 
to  repair  either.  First  of  all,  if  the 
dress  be  lined,  you  must  get  a  hem  or 
seam  open  somewhere  in  order  to 
work  on  the  wrong  side.  Then  catch 
the  edges  of  the  tear  together,  keeping 
them  very  flat,  and  if  it  be  large  or 
awkward  to  hold,  or  very  dark  in 
colour,  tack  the  whole  smoothly  on 
to  a  stiff  piece  of  white  card.  Now 
choose  your  darning  thread  and  needle. 
For  a  woollen  dress  there  is  nothing 
lesscouspicuous  than  ravellings  of  the 
material  itself,  but  failing  this  the 
silk  or  wool  must  be  matched  very 
carefully. 

Use  as  fine  a  needle  as  is  practicable. 
Start  darning  from  half-an-inch  to  an 
inch  beyond  one  end  of  the  tear  and 
work  backward  and  forward  across 
it,  going  on  each  side  half-an-inch 
beyond  the  frayed  portion.  However 
much  frayed  the  tear  may  be,  do  not 
cut  away  the  roughness,  but  stroke  it 
flat  with  the  needle,  and  be  very  care- 
ful to  weave  the  darning  strand  neatly 
and  securely  through  it.  Work  right 
to  the  end  of  one  slit,  and  then  start 
from  the  furthe"  end  of  the  other  slit, 
so  that  the  2  sets  of  darning  meet  and 
cross  at  the  angle,  thus  giving  addi- 
tional strength  just  where  it  is  most 
needed.  The  darning  completed,  you 
can  then  remove  the  tacking  stitches 
and  the  card,  and  with  a  warm  iron 
press  the  place  firmly  on  the  wrong 
side.  If  in  tearing,  the  material  has 
been  dragged  very  much  out  of  shape 
so  that  now  it  is  darned  it  does  not  lie 
flat,  put  a  damp  cloth  over  it,  and  iron 
through  that  till  the  cloth  is  dry. 
Then  repeat  the  process,  if  necessary, 
so  long  as  it  seems  to  be  doing  any 
good  at  all.  It  is  wise  first  to  try  on 
the  back  of  a  hem  or  seam  whether 
the  material  will  stand  this  without 


96 


changing  colour  or  cockling.  Then 
you  have  simply  to  replace  your  hem 
or  seam,  and  wear  your  dress,  deter- 
mined to  believe  that  everyone  else 
does  not  know  exactly  where  to  look 
for  that  darn. 
Those  Stocking  Legs  ! 

Even  when  the  feet  of  stockings 
seem  to  be  too  far  gone  to  be  of  any 
use,  it  is  possible  to  turn  them  to 
practical  use  if  the  legs  are  all  right. 
The  little  petticoat  illustrated  on  page 
94  illustrates  this. 

Cut  off  the  worn  portion.  Then  cut 
the  stocking  down  the  back  seam. 
When  the  pieces  are  spread  out  flat, 

it  will  be  seen   that   they  are  gore- 
shaped,  being  wide  at  the  top  of  the 

stocking,  and  narrowing  as  the  heel 

is    approached.       By    joining    a 

number 

of  "legs" 

together, 

the   wide 

part gives 

theneces- 

sary  flare 

at     the 

bottom  of 

the  petti- 
coat, and 

the     nar- 
row   part 

goes  into 

the  waist- 
fa  a  n  d  . 

Bind   the 

bottom 

with  some 

crimson 

braid, and 

n       f       the  A  PRETTY    ARRANGEMENT    OF 

put       bin  TENERIFFE    WHEELS. 


Utilizing  Small 
Pieces. 

upper  part  on  a  waistband,  and  you 
will  have  a  warm  petticoat  that  will 
be  a  boon  to  any  poor  child. 

Using  up  the 
Pieces. 

One  often  has  nice  pieces  of  linen 
or  other  material  left  over,  when  mak- 
ing, 'that  might  be  turned  to  good 
account.     The  tray-cloth,  shown   on 
page  93,  was  made  from  2  pieces  of 
plain  tea-cloth  linen  that  were  over 
after  some  aprons  had  been  cut  out. 
The  material  isbeautifully  serviceable, 
but  too  stout  to  hem  ;  so  each  piece 
was  bound  round  with  some  narrow 
strips  of  nainsook— likewise  cast  aside 
for    the    piece-bag.     These    binding 
strips    were    feather-stitched   round. 
A  piece  of  simple   Irish   insertion 
took    very    little    time     to     crochet, 
and  used 
only    a 
small 
amount 
of  cotton. 
Ardern's 
No  .    24 
was  used, 
as     the 
coarser 
t  h  read 
went 
better 
than    a 
finer  one 
with    the 
stout 
material. 
The  whole 
was  edged 
with  some 

No  directions  can  be        crochet, 
supplied  for  this. 


97 


C.N.      O 


Princess  Braid  Applique. 


This  is  a  very  simple  form  of  lace 
to  make,  and  yet,  when  done,  looks 
wonderfully  effective.  The  design 
shown,  being  arranged  in  the  form 
of  a  square,  would  be  most  suitable 
for  the  corner  of  a  square  collar,  but 
it  would  be  a  perfectly  simple  matter 
to  arrange  the  same  design  on  an 
entirely  different  shaped  foundation, 


1.  C0BNEB  IN  PRINCESS  BBAID    APPLIQUE. 


and  use  it  for  a  collar  of  any  other 
shape,  or  for  any  other  purpose 
desired. 

The  only  materials  required  for 
this  pretty  work  are  some  fine  Brussels 
net,  lace  braid,  some  crochet  cotton 
and  fine  lace  thread.  A  row  of  pearl 
edging  is  often  sewn  round  the  edge 
of  a  collar  to  finish  it  off.  This 
edging  can  be  bought  at  any  fancy 
work  depot. 

The  sprays  are  formed  o'f  lobes  of 
braid,  with  braid  of  a  larger  kind  for 
the  leaves,  and  the  stems  are  worked 
in  twist  stitch  with  Ardern's  No.  24 
Lustrous  Crochet  Cotton. 

First  draw  the  design  on  paper, 
tack  a  piece  of  Brussels  net  over  the 
paper,  then  apply  the  braid,  and  sew 
round  with  neat,  even  stitches,  using 
very  fine  thread  for  the  purpose. 

It  will  easily  be  seen  that  by  varying 
the  arrangement   of   the   braid,  and 
even  the    braid    itself,   a   variety   of 
different    designs  can   be    obtained. 
For  instance,  pretty  flowers  are  made 
by   using  four   or  five   loops   of  the 
plain  lace  braid  (the  kind  used  for  the 
inside  straight  border  of  the  design 
here   illustrated),   and 
working    in   the    centre, 
where    the    loops   meet, 
a  group  of  French  knots. 
Then    too,    leaflets,    and 
other   small   parts   of 
designs,    are    sometimes 
worked  in  darning. 

As  mentioned  above,  a 
pearl  edging  whipped 
along  the  edge,  makes  a 
pretty  finish  for  a  collar, 
handkerchief  border,  or 
length  of  lace. 


How  Needle  work  Reveals 
Our  Aims. 


BY  THE 

At  first  glance  it  may  seem  strange 
-  if  one  has  not  thought  about  the 
matter— to  say  that  our  needlework 
will,  to  some  extent,  reveal  our  aims 
in  life.  Yet  it  is  true  ;  and  whether 
we  know  it  or  not,  our  hand-work, 
and  the  way  we  do  it,  gives  a  wonder- 
fully accurate  indication  of  some  of 
our  chief  characteristics,  be  they  good 
or  bad.  More  than  this,  the  style  of 
needlework  that  we  do  as  a  recreation, 
in  our  spare  time,  will  to  a  very  large 
extent  help  to  mould  our  taste  and 
influence  us  in  a  way  we  little 
imagine. 

#       * 

Speaking  broadly,  all  needlework, 
whether  it  be  plain  or  fancy  stitchery, 
crochet  or  knitting,  can  be  placed 
under  one  or  two  heads  :  good  art 
and  bad  art.  Of  course  there  are 
many  grades,  and  a  multiplicity  of 
degrees  of  excellence;  but  in  the 
main  it  is  not  at  all  difficult  to  decide 
to  which  category  a  piece  of  work 
belongs  ;  as  a  rule  it  falls  easily  into 
its  proper  division  :  there  is  no  half- 
way house. 

Is  the  work  exactly  what  it  pre- 
tends to  be?  Does  it  serve  some 
definite  purpose?  Is  it  a  type  of 
work  suited  to  the  purpose  for  which 
it  is  to  be  used  ?  Is  it  executed  as 
well  as  the  worker  knows  how  ?  Is  it 
done  thoroughly  ?  Is  it  done  in  such 
a  way  that  it  will  wear  well,  and  last 
long  by  reason  of  its  careful  work- 
manship ?  If  so,  the  probability  is 
that  it  will  be  good  art. 

On  the  other  hand  :  Is  the  work  a 
base,  flimsy  imitation  of  some  superior 
form  of  the  craft?  Is  it  executed 


EDITOR. 

with  the  definite  intention  of  deceiv- 
ing the  eye  ?  Is  it  shoddy  work,  or  a 
sham  ?  Is  it  carelessly  done,  with  no 
attention  to  finish  ?  Is  it  unsuited  to 
the  purpose  for  which  it  is  to  be 
used  ?  Is  it  all  surface  show,  with  no 
body  in  it  that  will  stand  legitimate 
wear?  Is  it  the  type  of  work  that 
demands  neither  thoughtSk>r 
mechanical  skill  from  the  worker? 
Then  there  is  no  question  but  that  it 
will  be  bad  art. 

41  •* 

Consider  a  concrete  case  and  you 
will  see  more  clearly  what  I  mean .  I 
saw  a  girl  doing  a  piece  of  so-called 
embroidery  the  other  day— wild  roses 
on  white  satin  it  purported  to  be. 
But  when  one  got  close  to  it,  the  satin 
was  of  the  commonest  kind  (not 
worth  ornamenting  in  any  case,  and 
impossible  to  beautify  by  reason  of 
its  own  inherent  cheapness),  and  the 
roses  were  being  carelessly  worked  in 
coarse,  straggling  stitches,  each  made 
to  cover  as  much  space  as  possible. 
Neither  the  material  nor  the  work 
had  any  durable  quality  -  though 
perhaps  it  was  just  as  well  that  it 
would  not  last  ;  it  certainly  wasn't 
worth  preserving !  It  was  merely  a 
bit  of  showy  surface  work  that  was 
a  fraud  through  and  through.  The 
flowers  were  given  a  raised  appearance 
by  being  loosely  worked  with  a  very 
thick,  coloured  cotton  ;  and  at  close 
quarters  the  shallowness  of  it  all 
was  only  too  apparent  :  one  knew 
instinctively  what  an  impossible  rag 
the  whole  thing  would  be  after  the 
first  cleaning! 

I    asked    the   girl   what    she    was 

99 


How  Needlework 
Reveals  our  Aims. 

making?  "  O.h,  I  don't  quite  know  " 
she  said  ;  "I'm  just  doing  it  to  fill  up 
my  time — one  must  do  something  at 
the  seaside,  you  know.  Perhaps  I 
shall  make  it  up  as  a  table  centre  .  .  . 
No,  I  don't  suppose  there  will  be  any 
wear  in  it,  but  then,  I  shall  be  sure  to 
throw  it  away  the  moment  I  am  tired 
of  it." 

Now  here  was  bad  art  from  every 
point  of  view.  It  was  bad  work  on 
poor  material ;  it  was  being  done  for 
no  definite  purpose,  the  worker 
merely  wanted  to  kill  time ;  she  did 
not  con- 


Dutch  Interior,    showing  how  artistically  Cross-Stitch  can  be 
applied  to  Household  Linen. 


any  desire  to  attain  to  the  best,  a 
feeble  mental  outlook,  an  inartistic 
temperament,  a  disregard  of  the  value 
of  time,  and  a  blunted  sense  of 
honesty  ! 

How  much  better  it  would  have 
been  if  that  girl  had  taken  a  small 
piece  of  linen,  coarse  dowlais  if  she 
could  afford  nothing  finer,  and  have 
hemstitched  the  border,  or  drawn 
some  threads  and  done  a  narrow  simple 
piece  of  drawn-thread  work  round  it, 
or  feather-stitched  along  a  hem  and 
added  a  piece  of  crochet,  and  in  this 
way  made 
a  tray  - 
cloth  that 
would 
have 
been  of 
definite 
use  when 
done, 
that 
would 
have 
stood 
a  f  a  i  r 
amount 
of  wear, 
and  would 
have been 
good  art 
so  far  as 
it  went, 
even 
though 
that  was 
not  very 
far. 

B  y  s  o- 
doing, 
that  girl 
would 
have-been 
benefit- 


100 


ing  the  community,  instead 
of  injuring  it;  she  would 
have  been  employing  her 
time  in  producing  work 
that  was  some  use,  instead 
of  killing  time  by  producing 
something  worthless  and 
adding  yet  one  more  in- 
artistic item  to  a  world 
that  is  over- stocked  in  that 
direction  already,  and  doesn't 
need  its  eyesight  harassed 
any  further. 

The  lace  makers,  and  em- 
broiderers, and  needle- 
work«rs  of  past  ages  set 
about  their  tasks  in  a  very  different 
manner.  As  individuals,  they  may 
often  have  been  lacking  in  general 
learning,  they  may  have  known  but 
little  beyond  that  particular  pattern 
they  worked,  but  what  they  did,  they 
did  well— as  well  as  ever  they  knew 
how  ;  and  they  did  it  in  such  a  way 
that  their  work  was  not  only  worth 
preserving,  but  it  possessed  lasting 
qualities  that  have  withstood  in  some 
cases,  generations  of  handling  and 
use. 

Those  workers  took  a  pride  in  their 
work  ;  and  while  many  of  them  did 
tieedlecraft  for  a  livelihood,  they  were 
artists  who  worked  for  more  than 
that  mere  livelihood.  Their  hand- 
work stood  to  them  for  something 
much  more  dignified  than  a  moment's 
superficial  show,  to  be  thrown  away 
again  without  hesitation  at  the 
caprice  of  fashion.  The  needlework 
of  the  past  was  often  too  beautiful  for 
those  who  used  it  to  get  tired  of  it  ; 
like  all  real  art,  it  was  beautiful  for 
all  time;  not  a  bit  of  clap-trap  for 
the  moment  only,  and  you  will 
-realize  this  if  you  study  the  needle- 


Take  your 
needle,  my  child, 
and  work  at  your 
pattern ;  it  will 
come  out  a  rose 
by-and-by.  Life 
is  like  that — one 
stitch  at  a  time 
taken  patiently 
and  the  pattern 
will  come  out  all 
right  like  the 
embroidery. 

Oliver 

Wendell 

Holmes 


'»**  5 ?*•:-.  The-  Meaning  of 
S'vi  -ftdte  Work. 

work  in  the  museums  in 
England  and  on  the 
Continent. 

But  this  does  not  mean 
that  it  was  all  very  elaborate. 
Some  of  the  old  needle- 
work was  'quite  simple  in 
design.  But  whether  it  was 
plain  or  ornate,  when  the 
workers  put  into  it  the  best 
that  they  were  able  to  do, 
and  worked  with  a  humble 
sincerity  of  purpose,  they 
invariably  achieved  beauti- 
ful lasting  results  that  we— 
in  this  enlightened  age- 
have  not  been  able  to  im- 
upon,  indeed  have  seldom 


prove 

succeeded  in  equalling. 


I  want  to  urge  those  of  you  who 
have  any  time  to  give  to  needlework 
to  remember  that  this  is  as  much  an 
art  as  painting  and  music  and  archi- 
tecture.     You   can    be   blunting  -  or 
elevating—  your   artistic    sense    (and 
that  of  other  people)  by  the  type  of 
work  you  produce  and  display,  just 
as  much  as  by  the  type  of  picture  you 
hang  upon  your  wall.     You  will  be 
lowering  your  ideals  by  doing  shoddy 
work  and  false  work,  just  as  you  will 
be  raising  them  by  doing  work  that 
is  thorough  and  conscientious. 
What  do  I  mean  by  "false  work  "  ? 
I  mean  the  sort  of  work  that  strives 
by  cheap  tricks  to  look   like    some- 
thing that  it  isn't  !     I  recently  saw  a 
blouse  that  a  girl  had  trimmed  with 
some    indifferent,    machine-made 
coarse    cotton    insertion,  which   she 
had  embellished  with  coloured  wool 
and  a  little  gilt  thread  run  in  and  out 
around   the   pattern.      She    told    me 
she  had  done  it  herself,  and  asked  if 


101 


V 


How  Needlework 
our  Aims.         '•»- 


I  didn't  think  it  had  a  rich  Oriental 
effect !  !  She  said  she  had  got  the 
idea  from  Paris— as  though  that 
necessarily  stamped  it  as  artistic  and 
desirable  ! 

Sometimes  it  is  very  hard  to  be 
kind  as  well  as  truthful!  I  didn't 
want  to  hurt  her  feelings  by  telling 
her  exactly  what  I  thought:  viz., 
that  it  utterly  vulgarised  her  blouse 
and  revealed  a  deplorably  ' '  common  ' ' 
streak  in  her  personal  taste  !  I  did 
the  best  I  could  under  the  circum- 
stances by  saying  that  I  thought  the 
blouse  material  (which  was  a  pretty, 
simple  pattern)  didn't  need  the  trim- 
ming to  set  it  off. 

This  serves  to  show  what  I  mean 
when  I  speak  of  ' '  false  work  ;  ' '  there 
is  a  tremendous  amount  of  it  about 
nowadays,  and  it  is  all  of  it  rotten. 
It  is  having  not  only  a  detrimental 
effect  on  our  national  taste,  but  also 
on  our  morals. 

The  girl  who  will  don  badly-mach- 
ined, ready-made  underwear,  gaudily 
trimmed  with  cheap  imitation  lace, 
and  garnished  with  bows  of  papery 
ribbon,  is  not  only  wasting  her  money 
in  buying  such  garments,  but  is 


actually  pandering  to  dishonesty,  and 
encouraging  herself  to  tolerate  and 
condone  what  is  false  and  bad— 
hopelessly  bad. 

The  girl  who  takes  a  pleasure  in 
making  her  own  things  (if  she  has 
the  time)  as  nicely  as  they  can  be 
made  (whether  by  machine  or  by 
hand),  putting  fine,  even  feather- 
stitching  and  such-like  work  into 
them  instead  of  the  "cheap  and 
nasty  "  imitation  lace  and  ribbon,  is 
fostering  a  love  of  truth  and  sincerity,, 
as  well  as  cultivating  a  sense  of 
beauty  and  fitness. 

Such  matters  may  seem  trivial  and 
of  little  account  to  the  superficial 
mind:  but  they  are  of  grave  import- 
ance in  the  formation  of  character ; 
and  the  girl  or  woman  who  puts  good 
work,  careful  work,  thorough  work, 
finished  work — no  matter  how  simple 
—  into  her  personal  wear  and  her 
household  furnishings,  is  having  an 
influence  for  good  on  her  day  and 
generation.  She  is  helping  to  mould 
the  taste  of  those  who  see  or  handle 
the  things  she  has  made;  and  above 
all,  she  is  following  the  command: 
"  Whatsoever  thy  hand  findeth  to  do. 
do  it  with  thy  might." 


102 


Mosaic  Filet  Lace. 


Mosaic  filet  lace  is 
a  novel  idea  in  fancy- 
work.  In  this  the 
design  is  worked  with 
very  narrow  ribbon 
somewhat  like  be'be' 
ribbon,  but  finer  and 
softer.  It  is  about 
Xe-inch  in  width  and 
made  in  all  the 
principal  colours,  as 
well  as  striped  and 
8  haded .  Use  an 
ordinary  darning 
needle,  or  a  crewel 
needle,  and  work  the 
design  by  running 
the  ribbon  in  and  out 
through  the  meshes, 
in  plain  darning- 


EFFECTIVE  DESIGN    FOB 
OXWHION-OOVMR. 


stitch.  Twice 
will  be  sum- 
ci  en  t    for 
each   row  of 
the   meshes, 
that   is    just 
upanddown. 
Cross  from 
one  point  to 
another 
when    desir- 
able on   the 
back  of   the 
work  behind 
the  stitches, 
running  the 
ribbon,  now 
and  the*, 
under  one  of 
the  strands 
of  the  net  to 
be    seen 
behind     the 
part    you 
wish  to  cross 


Lacet  Braiding. 


A  DECORATIVE  MOTIF  IN   WHITE  BRAID 
WITH   FANCT   STITCHES. 


Lacet  braid- 
ing cannot 
be  written  of 
as  a  new  idea, 
but  it  may 
well  be  re- 
vived as  an 
eff  e  c  t  i  ve 
means  of 
embroidery. 
In  conjunc- 
tion with 
the  various 
stitches  used 
in  fancy- 
work,  practi- 
cally any  article  can  be  decorated. 

The  lacet  braid  itself  is  of  French 
make,  and 
costs  Id.  a 
bundle.  The 
colours  in 
which  it  can 
be  had  are 
white,  red 
and  dark 
blue,  and  are 
best  used  on 
a  contrast. 

As  the  braid 
washes,  it  is 
as  well  to 
have  the 
groundwork 
of  a  simi- 
lar nature. 
Linen,  either 
white  or  col- 
oured, is  one 
of  the  best 
to  use,  and 
there  are  sev- 
eral kinds  of 
holland-like 
stuffs  for 
embroidery 


zt 


A  DESIGN  FOB  A  BAG  IN   WHITE  BRAID  WITH 
HERRING-BONE  FILLING. 

104 


which  are 
suitable, 
although  not 
so  lasting. 
Often  one 
can  purchase 
centres  and 
such-like  at 
fancy  -  work 
shops  with 
a  pattern 
ready  traced 
upon  them. 
Not  every 
design,  how- 
ever, willsuit 

the  lacet  braids.  Natural  groups  and 
sprays  of  flowers  are  best  avoided,  as 
they  mean, 
in  most  in- 
stances, too 
many  curves, 
and  large 
flowers  re- 
quire more 
than  a  braid 
outline.  A 
conventional 
design 
should  there- 
for e  be 
chosen,  with 
fairly  close 
lines. 

Curves  can 
be  negotiat- 
ed without 
puckeri  ng 
the  corners, 
but  in  all 
cases  where 
practicable, 
it  is  as  well 
to  fold  the 
braid  over, 
both  sides 


AN  INITIAL  FRAMED  IN  BED  AND  WHITE 
BRAID  AND  FRENCH  KNOTS. 


being    alike. 
Fine  cotton 
(No.    80    for 
preference) 
is     used     to 
stitch    the 
braid   on    to 
the  lines    of 
the   design, 
and  naturally 
only    small 
stitches 
must      be 
made  or  the  braid  will  not  lie  close 
and  flat.     Sufficient  braid  to  cover  a 
few  lines  of  the  design  is  cut  off,  and 
then   threaded 
through  from  the       r 
back  to  the  front 
•of    the    material, 
with    a   needle 
large  enough    to 
take    the     braid. 
Then   it  is  sewn 
down  evenly  with 
the    fine    cotton, 
until    a  point   is 
reachedwherethe 
braid    must   be 
taken  through  to 
the   back  of   the 
material,     to    be 
brought  up  again 
at  the  nearest  point. 

It  is  not  possible  to  do  all  the  braid- 
ing   of    a    fair-sized    piece   of  work 


A  CONVENTIONAL.  DESIGN  IN  RED  BRAID 
WITH  DARNING  STITCH. 


Patterns  for 
Initials. 

without  a 
break,  as  the 
braid  is 
liable  to  be- 
come stringy 
after  it  has 
been  pulled 
through  a 
few  times. 
The  ends  of 
the  braid 
must  be  sewn 
down  neatly 
on the  wrong 
side  of  the  work. 

In  cases  where  the  lines  of  the 
design  come  closely  together,  one  row 
of  the  braid  is 
laid  over  the 
other,andtheend 
finally  taken  to 
the  back  through 
the  same  hole. 

There  is  a  cer- 
tain danger  of 
puckering  the 
work  when  the 
braid  is  being 
sewn  across  the 
material  when  it 
comes  on  the 
cross,  but  this  is 
practically  the 
only  point  on 

which  extra  care  must  be  taken.  All 
the  braiding  is  done  before  any 
embroidery  in  silk  or  mercerised 


<&vS"33s 
'  ssxsa? 


f 


AN  END  FOR   A  HUCKABACK  TOWEL,  INTRODUCING  LACET  BRAIDING. 

105 


Lacct 
Braiding. 

thread      is      introduced. 

The  Design  for 
a  Bag. 

Although  the  braid  may  well  be 
used  alone,  yet  the  addition  of  some 
embroidery  stitches  between  the  lines 
is  a  great  improvement.  In  this,  her- 
ring-boning on  a  close  scale  fills  up 
the  spaces  of  the  flower  and  stalk; 
the  leaves  are  left  plain  for  contrast's 
sake. 

A  Decorative 
Motif. 

Here  the  braid  is  used  both  in 
straight  and  curved  lines,  and  the 
spaces  are  filled  with  different  stitches. 

The  lower  part  is  outlined  with 
blanket  stitching,  and  the  next  small 
space  filled  with  French  knots.  Each 
small  square  is  crossed  with  6  threads, 
fixed  in  its  centre  by  1  French  knot. 

The  "  bows  "  and  "  buckle  "  are  treated 
the  same  way  in  their  centres,  and  in 


their    outer    spaces    filled    in    with 
Oriental  stitch  again. 

A  Framed  Initial. 

Red  and  white  lacet  braids  may  be 
employed  together  for  some  marking 
purposes.  A  "framework"  may  be 
made  of  any  shape  and  size  to  take 
1  or  more  initials,  which  could  be 
worked  in  red  or  white  mercerised 
cotton.  The  French  knots  make  a 
great  improvement  to  the  appearance 
of  this  form  of  marking. 

An  End  for  a  Huckaback 
Towel. 

Marking  in  red  only  cannot  be 
recommended  for  much  more  than 
towels,  and  huckaback  is  the  best 
medium  on  which  to  work  the  braid. 
A  central  initial  and  a  design  on  either 
side  is  quite  sufficient.  This  is  a  sug- 
gestion which  can  be  easily  copied. 
Darning  stitch  in  red  cotton  is  here 
used  to  fill  up  a  few  spaces. 


Darned  Filet  Crochet  Squares  are  pretty  for  inset  in  linen 
or  Congress  canvas, 


106 


esigns  in  Hedebo  Embroidery, 


A    COLLAB  IN    HEDEBO    EMBROIDEBT. 


Bee  next  page  for  article  on  this  work. 


••**- 


A  PILLOW  CASE  IN  HEDEBO  EMBBOIDEKY. 


ANOTHEB  HEDEBO   COLLAB  FOB  UNDEBWKAB. 


107 


The    Story    of   Hedebo 
Embroidery. 


A  8TOLPE-KL.EDE.      USED  IN    DENMARK 
IN  PAST  YEARS  AS  WALL  HANGINGS- 

108 


Hedebo  embroidery,  one  of  the 
most  popular  forms  of  Danish  needle- 
work, takes  its  name  from  the  stretch 
of  heath  (hede)  that  lies  between 
Copenhagen  (Kjoge)  and  Roskildein 
Denmark.  From  time  immemorial 
the  peasantry  who  lived  (live  =  &o) 
there  have  spun  and  woven  their  own 
linen  from  th.e  flax  grown  on  their 
farms,  and  their  pride  in  their  home- 
made articles  was  very  great.  This 
led  to  a  desire  to  further  ornament 
their  garments  and  household  linen, 
and  the  idea  of  drawing  out  some  of 
the  threads  and  rearranging  them 
with  a  needle  and  thread  was  their 
first  attempt  at  Hedebo  stitchery. 
This  probably  began  as  early  as  the 
fifteenth  century.  From  these  first 
simple  patterns  the  peasant  women 
of  the  Hedebo  district  invented  and 
improved  stitches  and  designs  from 
year  to  year,  until  a  very  high 
standard  of  art  industry  was  attained. 

Flax  played  an  important  part  in 
connection  with  the  love  affairs  of 
these  people.  The  peasant  lad  carved 
some  implement  used  for  the  prepar- 
ing of  flax,  and  presented  it  to  his 
lady-love  as  a  prelude  to  the  formal 
proposal.  And  her  first  gift  to  her 
betrothed  was  a  flaxen  shirt  with 
elaborately-wrought  collar,  front  and 
wristbands.  In  due  course  the  happy 
home  was  made  beautiful  with  hang- 
ings of  various  descriptions  in 
Hedebo  work.  Over  the  bedstead 
was  a  frieze  ;  between  the  two  doors 
leading  to  the  kitchen  and  the 
passage  was  a  panel.  Other  items 
that  were  the  ornaments  of  every 
peasant  homestead  were  sham  towels 
and  pillow-cases. 

These  peasant  women  worked  solely 


Hedebo  work 
versus  Digging. 


for  the  love  of  it,  for  the  embroidery 
itself  was  not  known  or  recognised 
outside  their  sphere,  and  was  there- 
fore of  no  market  value.  So  great 
was  the  fascination  of  the  stitchery 
that  the  workers  would  often  forego 
a  night's  rest  in  order  to  finish  a 
piece  of  work. 

And  even  where  the  husband  was 
averse — as  was  sometimes  the  case — 
to  any  such  "  fancy-work,"  the  spell 
of  it  was  irresistible,  and  the  em- 
broidery was  consequently  executed 
clandestinely.  History  relates  of  one 
girl  who  was  told  to  dig  a  pit  in  a 
field  for  some  stones.  When  the 
digging  was  finished,  she  sat  down  to 
rest. for  a  few  minutes.  The  Hedebo 
needlework,  hidden  in  her  pocket, 
came  out,  and  she  was  about  to  enjoy 
a  little  of  this  pleasanter  occupation, 
when  she  saw  her  father  coming. 
To  return  it  to  her  pocket  would  only 
attract  his  attention  to  her  delin- 
quency. So  she  hastily  flung  it  into 
the  pit,  and  covered  it  with  earth, 
meaning  to  unearth  it  as  soon  as 
he  had  disappeared.  But  she  was 
discovered,  and  her  stern  parent, 
without  a  word,  rolled  some  stones 
into  th,e  pit  and  covered  them  with 
earth.  The  long-cherished  treasure 
therefore  remained  buried  for  ever- 
more. 

The  evolution  of  the  Hedebo  style 
is  interesting.  Up  to  1815  the 
patterns  consist  of  highly  conven- 
tionalised drawings  of  flowers  and 
animals  on  a  background  of  labori- 
ously-wrought drawn-thread  work. 
Then  it  passes  through  another 
phase.  The  style  is  still  the  same — 
stiff  figures— but  with  the  linen  itself 
as  background  (about  1830).  Then 
the  style  undergoes  a  great  change 


A    8TOLPE-KUEDE.       THESE    WERE    HtJNO 
BETWEEN  TWO  DOORB  IN  THE  LIVING  ROOM. 


109 


The  Story  of  Hedebo 
Embroidery. 


A      KN-E-DUG"     IN  PAST  YEABB  THESE  WEBB  USED  IN  DENMABK  AS 
WALL.  HANGINGS,  IN  THE  LIVING-BOOM  BY  THE  HEARTH. 


The  flower  motifs  become  richer  and 
freer  ;  there  is  also  greater  variety  of 
stitches  in  the  open-work,  which  is 
profusely  embellished  with  chain- 
stitch  embroidery  in  rows,  circles 
and  scrolls  ;  the  designs  are  graceful 
and  the  general  effect  is  very  lovely. 
About  1840  Hedebo  embroidery 
reaches  its  zenith,  of  beauty  and 
perfection  ;  the  open-work  motifs 
present  a  still  greater  variety  of 
stitches,  and  the  work  is,  moreover, 
richly  ornamented  with  garlands  of 
flowers  in  satin-stitch  embroidery. 
The  stitchery  of  this  period  is  exqui- 
site, both  as  regards  design  and 
execution. 

Now  follows  the  decline  of  the 
work,  showing  the  artifices  used  for 
studying  the  effect  to  the  detriment 
-of  the  actual  work  ;  for  instance,  the 


trick  of  cutting  out  instead  of  draw- 
ing the  threads,  the  long  loose  chain 
stitches  instead  of  the  previous  care- 
ful ones,  lovingly,  almost  reverently, 
done.  All  this  contributed  to  the 
degradation  of  the  beautiful  old  art. 

Hedebo  embroidery  was  sadly  on 
the  wane  when  some  needlework 
experts  decided  to  revive  it.  The 
best  Hedebo  designs  were  bought  or 
borrowed  and  thoroughly  examined, 
much  time  and  money  being  ex- 
pended, and  "  The  Society  for  the 
Revival  of  Hedebo  Work  "  was  formed . 
Although  it  did  not  possess  any 
capital,  various  difficulties  were  over- 
come by  those  interested  in  the  work. 
The  Art  and  Industrial  School  for 
Women  offered  the  newly-formed 
society  a  flat  free  of  rent,  clever  artists 
gave  designs,  and  the  Directress  of 


110 


the  Art  and  Industrial  School  under- 
took the  responsibility  of  leadership. 
Tjhe  Society,  whose  aim  it  is  to  revive 
the  art  and  to  apply  it  with  a  view 
to  modern  requirements,  is  growing 
rapidly,  and  has  now  270  members. 
The  best  forms  of  Hedebo  needle- 
work are  taught  to  its  members,  and 
such  work  as  passes  the  criticism  of 
the  consulting  needlework  specialist 
is  bought  by  the  society.  All  the  work 
done  by  the  members  is  designed  by 
the  artists  of  the  society,  and  twice 
a  week  members  can  get  advice  as  to 
their  patterns.  The  work  of  this 
society  is  becoming  very  well  known 
both  in  and  out  of  Denmark,  and 
it  possesses  many  exquisite  designs 
from  which  to  study  the  styles.  But 
its  aim  is  also  to  improve  the  art  if 
possible,  and  no  effort  seems  too 
great  for  them  so  that  they  attain 
this  end.  And  a  large  collection  of 


The  Revival 
of  the  Craft. 

"  revived  "  work,  exquisitely  designed 
and  executed,  testifies  to  a  result 
that  must  be  highly  gratifying. 

It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  the 
majority  of  the  initiators  of  this 
society  are  men — --University  Pro- 
fessors of  the  Danish  Royal  Academy 
of  Art,  and  other  eminent  artists  and 
architects.  It  is  therefore  not  surpris- 
ing that  when  first-rate  needlework 
experts  took  up  the  work  under  such 
guidance,  its  delicate  beauty  should 
be  restored,  for  it  has  been  revived 
with  tenderness  for  itself  as  well  as 
with  reverence  for  its  creators — the 
women  who  lived  on  the  Roskilde 
Heath. 

We  are  not  dealing  with  the  actual 
working  of  Hedebo  Embroidery  in 
this  book,  as  full  details  of  all  the 
stitches  appear  in  the  companion 
volume,  The  Home  Art  Book  of  Fancy 
Stitchery. 


ANOTHER  BEAUTIFUL 


For  the  Home  DressmaKer. 


Boning  a  Bodice 

Lining. 

When  making  a  bone-cased  bodice- 
lining,  all  the  bone-casings  should 
be  eased  when  sewing  on,  and  sewn 
very  strongly  down  each  seam.  Also 
it  is  much  better  to  use  a  good 
quality  Prussian  bind,  or  galon,  for 
the  bone-casings  than  a  cheap  one, 
as  it  costs  very  little  more,  and  will 
probably  last  as  long  as  the  dress. 

Then  for  this  purpose  there  is 
really  nothing  to  beat  the  ready-cased 
feather-bone,  which  is  sold  by  the 
yard  at  the  best  drapers,  and  may  be 
obtained  with  a  silk  or  satin  casing, 
as  well  as  a  cotton  casing,  either  in 
black  or  white;  the  silk  or  satin- 
cased  feather-bone  is  especially  suit- 
able for  evening  and  best  dresses 
wlach  have  a  silk  or  satin  bodice- 


lining.  This  has  only  to  be  stitched 
on  to  one  side  of  the  turnings  of  the 
seam,  as  closely  as  possible  to  the 
stitching  of  the  seam.  After  it  has 
been  stitched  on,  and  the  ends  of  the 
stitching  tied  off  and  fastened 
strongly,  a  tiny  piece  of  the  whale- 
bone (about  half  an  inch)  should  be 
cut  away  from  the  inside  casing, 
leaving  just  sufficient  of  the  casing 
to  neaten  the  end. 

Joining  the  Seams 
of  a  Skirt. 

When  stitching  up  inside  skirt 
seams,  especially  those  to  be  pressed 
open,  be  very  careful  to  see  both 
edges  are  quite  smooth  before  tacking 
up;  nothing  looks  so  bad  as  a  puckered 
seam,  with  perhaps  one  edge  of  the 
material  eased  on  one  side,  and  the 
other  side  quite  tight.  If  care  is  not 


^ 


r  f 


DETAIL  OF  HEDEBO  "  STOI.PE-KLoEDE "  SHOWN  ON  PAGE   108. 

112 


Practical 
Points. 


taken  before  the  seam  is  stitched  up, 
no  amount  of  pressing  with  the  iron 
afterwards  will  set  it  right. 

Also  be  sure  the  stitching  is  quite 
straight.  In  the  case  of  dark 
materials  a  rule  may  be  laid  down 
the  seam,  and  a  chalk  or  crayon  pencil 
line  marked  close  to  the  rule  before 
stitching;  or  a  piece  of  ordinary 
wide  tape,  held  firm  at  either  end 
with  a  drawing-pin,  would  answer 
the  purpose,  should  any  reader  not 
possess  a  rule  long  enough.  For 
light  materials  a  tacking  may  be 
placed  close  to  the  tape  instead  of  a 
pencil  or  chalk  mark. 

Cr£pe  de  Chine,  ninon,  and  all  thin 
flimsy  materials  are  best  stitched 
over  paper,  as  it  prevents  the  seams 
looking  drawn.  The  paper  can  be 
pulled  away  after  the  seams  or  hems 
are  stitched.  In  fact,  all  very  thin 
materials  look  better  when  stitched 
with  paper  underneath  them. 

Getting  an  Even 
Length. 

When  allowing  for  the  length  of  a 
skirt,  it  is  best  to  take  the  measure- 
ments from  the  waist  to  the  ground 
at  the  front,  back,  and  the  hips. 
Then  turn  up  the  skirt  to  the  length 
you  require  it  off  the  ground.  For 
instance,  if  the  length  should  be 
42  inches  to  the  ground,  and  you 
want  a  skirt  to  be  4  inches  off  the 
ground,  you  would  turn  up  the  skirt 
to  measure  38  inches,  taking  4  inches 
off  the  measurements  to  the  ground 
all  round  the  skirt.  Tack  up  the 
hem  to  these  measurements,  then 
try  on  the  skirt  and  see  that  it  is 
quite  even  before  stitching  the  hem. 

Pressing. 

When  pressing  seams  and  hems 
(and  when  a  garment  is  well  pressed 
it  makes  all  the  difference  in  its 


appearance),  there  is  no  need  to  use 
all  one's  strength,  as  it  were,  as  I 
have  seen  some  really  good  workers 
try  to  do. 

To  Cover  Button 
Moulds. 

Before  covering  button-moulds  with 
the  material,  the  holes  of  the  mould 
should  be  filled  up  with  a  tiny  piece 
of  cotton-wool,  pushed  in  from  the 
back  of  the  mould  with  the  sharp 
point  of  the  scissors.  And  if  the 
buttons  are  to  be  covered  with  a  very 
thin  material,  such  as  soft  silk  or 
satin,  they  will  look,  and  also  wear, 
-  better  if  the  mould  is  covered  with  a 
little  piece  of  lining  first  before 
putting  on  the  outside  covering. 

When  Turning  Hems 
on  Thin  Materials. 

French  knots  are  often  usecl  now 
for  finishing  hems  and  fastening 
pleats,  and  any  reader  who  does  not 
possess  a  sewing-machine,  I  am  sur^ 
will  find  these  have  a  much  nicer 
appearance  than  hand-hemming  in 
the  ordinary  way.  Also  they,  of 
course,  make  the  hem  much  stronger, 
especially  for  thin  materials,  where 
hemming  stitches  would  be  likely  to 
show  more,  and  for  this  reason  do 
not  have  a  very  firm  hold  on  the 
second  thickness  of  the  material. 

Applying  Trimmings. 

Ribbon,  velvet  and  silk,  or  mohair 
braid  trimmings  are  best  sewn  on  by 
hand  with  silk,  and  only  one  stitch 
taken  at  a  time,  although  in  some 
instances  the  sewing-machine  may  be 
used  to  advantage. 

The  Foundation 
Band. 

A  one-piece    dress  will  feel  much 
more  comfortable  if    the    bodice  is 
mounted  and  sewn  on  to  a  founda- 
tion-band of  petersham,  shaped  and 
113  C-N'     H 


For  the  Home 
Dressmaker. 


\>  IS*»^ 

>  Vv  «.*»•»"> 


*  ;trt-.!*^l?T?: 


DETAIL,  OF  HEDEBO   "KN.K-DUG"  ILLUSTRATED  ON  PAGE   111. 


boned,  made  to  fit  the  waist,  the  top 
of  the  skirt  being  sewn  to  the  top  of 
the  band.  These  bands  should  be 
fitted  to  the  size  of  the  waist,  and  the 
hooks  and  eyes  sewn  on  before  join- 
ing them  to  the  dress.  If  preferred, 
shaped  belting  ready  boned  may  be 
obtained  at  most  drapers,  in  different 
widths,  for  about  sixpence  per  yard. 
Fasteners, 

The  larger  press-studs  or  fasteners, 
are  much  better  and  stronger  than 
the  small  size  fasteners  for  thick 
materials,  such  as  serge  or  cloth, 
while  for  thin  silk,  satin,  lace  or  net, 
the  smaller  sizes  are  more  suitable. 
Crossway  Bands  and  Pipings. 

In    making   cord   pipings,     bias 


bands,  or  flounced  trimmings,  be 
sure  the  material  is  cut  quite  on  the 
bias  before  starting  to  cut  the  strips 
required,  or  it  will  spoil  the  appear- 
ance of  them,  and  they  will  not  set 
properly. 

To  Edge  Collars 
and  Cuffs. 

Stitching,  in  pretty  shades  of 
embroidery  silk,  to  correspond  with 
the  dress,  is  a  nice  finish  for  a  ninon 
yoke,  or  collar  and  cuffs  to  a  dress. 
For  example,  a  navy  blue,  with 
alternate  stitches  of  navy  and  red,  is 
very  pretty,  or  perhaps  three  navy 
stitches  and  then  one  red  stitch. 
This  is,  of  course,  just  a  matter  of 
individual  taste. 


1'rinted  for  the  Proprietors  of  "THE  GIRL'S  OWN  PAPER  &  WOMAN'S  MAGAZINE" 
by  CURTIS  &  BEAMISH,  LTD.,  COVENTRY,  ENGLAND. 


SECOND  EDITION.     Price  I/-  net  (by  post,  1/5). 

THE    MISTRESS   OF 
THE  LITTLE  HOUSE 

What  she  should  Know  and 
what  she  should  Do  when 
she  has  an  Untrained  Servant 

Edited  by  FLORA  RLICRMANN 

Editor  of  "  The  Girl's  Own  Paper  &  Woman's  Magazine:' 

The  Lady  says:— "It  is  a  most  useful  little  volume." 

The   British  Weekly   says :—"  This   is   an    invaluable  little   book  for    the    young 

housekeeper." 
The  Pall  Mall  Gazette  says:— "The  information   is   brightly   conveyed  and  well 

arranged." 
The  Guardian  says:— "It is  full  of  practical  information,  pleasantly  put,  for  ever 

housewife." 

The  Schoolmistress  says  :— "It  is  an  excellent  series  of  practical  talks. "^ 
The  Christian  World  says:— "No  small  household  should  be  without  it." 

London  : 

The    Office    of   "The    Girl's    Own    Paper   and  Woman's  Magazine" 
4  Bouverie  Street  B.C.,  and  of  all  Booksellers 


The  Broderie  Russe 

289,  Regent  Street,  W., 

SPECIALISE     IN   ^—*s;e^ 

Tapestry,  Filet  Lace,  Venise, 
Baro,  Hedebo,  Reticella  and 
all  other  Art  Embroideries. 

A    LARGE    STOCK    OF    TRACED 
AND    FINISHED    GOODS. 


LESSONS     GIVEN     IN    ALL    THE    ABOVE. 


PAPER   PATTERNS 

Price  4dL.    each,    exclusive  of  postage. 

The  following  Paper  Patterns,  which  are  of  special  French  cut,  and  perfect 

H?l££'  Can  always  bc  obtained  by  writing  to  the  Fashion  Editor,  THE  GIRL'S 

OWN  PAPER  AND  WOMAN'S  MAGAZINE,  4  Bouverie  Street,  London,  E.C. 

When  ordering,  state  bust  or  waist  measure  and  number  of  pattern. 

Blouses. 


Number 

American  Shirt  Blouse  ...  5339 

Shirt  Blouse  with  gathered  front 

and  pointed  collar  ...   7476 

Raglan-Shouldered  Blouse        ...  9062 
Yoked  Shirt  Blouse  ...  ..,  9061 

Skirts. 
Three-piece  Skirt        ...  ...   7002 

Four-gored  Walking  Skirt        ...  6743 
Five-gored  Walking  Skirt       ...  7251 
Coats  and  Cloaks. 
Three-quarter  Coat,    with    Cir- 
cular Cape  ...  ...  8003 

Semi-fitting  Short  Coat  ...  3052 

Evening  Cloak  ...  ...  2017 

Cape  ...  ...  ...  2016 

Ladies'  Underwear. 
Set    of     Underwear,     including 

Chemise,  Camisole  and  Knickers  3043 
Square-yoked  Nightdress  ...  3036 

Empire  Nightdress  with  V-neck    6481 
One-piece  Nightdress...  ...  6479 

Magyar  Nightgown  ...  ...  3040 

Empire  Nightdress,  with   short 

puff  Sleeves         ...  ...  1933 

Plain  Chemise  ...  ...  5832 

Square-necked  Chemise  ...  5855 

Envelope  Chemise       ...  ...  1)083 

Open  Knickers  and  Bloomers  ...  2570 
Cycling  Knickers        ...  ...  2049 

Combinations  ...  ...  2000 

Combination    Corset   Cover   and 

Knickers  ...  ...  9082 

Combination      Camisole      and 

Underskirt  ...  ...  9072 

High-waisted  Combination  Cor- 
set Cover  and  Knickers      ...  5395 
Two-piece  Underskirt  ...  4028 

Four-gored      Underskirt,      with 

shaped  flounce  ...  ...  2300 

Five-gored  Underskirt  ...  3038 

Princess  Petticoat       ...  ...  3024 

Two-piece  Underslip  ...  ...  5030 

Princess  Underslip,  with  long  or 

short  Sleeves        ...  ...  1923 

One-piece  Camisole,  buttoned  on 

shoulders  ...  ...  2299 

Camisole,  with  round  or  square 

neck       ...  ...  ...   7235 

Camisole,  with  Sleeves  &  Basaue  6067 
Magyar  Camisole        ...  ...  6132 

One-piece  Circular  Dressing  Cape  2039 
One-piece  Dressing  Jacket        ...  1909 
Dressing   Jacket,  with    Kimono 

Sleeves  ...  ...  ...  2071 

One-piece  Dressing  Jacket,  with 

Long  or  Short  Sleeves       ...  4020 
Loose  Dressing  Gown,  fastening 

at  side-front  ..  6490 


Dressing    Gown,  with    Raglan  Numbe» 

Sleeves  ...  ...  ...  5538 

Dressing     Gown,      with     deep- 
pointed   Collar    ...  ...   1906 

Overalls  and  Aprons. 

Square-necked      Overall,      with 

long  or  short  sleeves          ...  2346 
Square-Yoked  Overall  with  long 

sleeves  ...  ...  ...  9020 

Princess  Apron,  without  Sleeves    1179 
Fitted   Apron,   with    adjustable 

Sleeves  ...  ...  ...  1450 

Pinafore  Apron,  without  Sleeves  1266 
Sleeveless   Overall  fastening  at 

side  front  ...  ...     9096 

Two-piece  Overall,  with  peasant 

Sleeves  ...  ...  ...  2047 

Cookery    Apron,     fastening     on 

shoulders  ...  ...  2024 

Fancy  Work-apron,  with  square 

neck       ...  ...  ...  6510 

Fitted  Empire  Apron,  with  wide 

shoulder  straps    ...  ...  6512 

Fancy    Afternoon  Apron,    with 

cross-over  Bib      ...  ...  6514 

Fancy  Afternoon  Apron,  without 

Bib         ...  ...  ...  6521 

Fancy  Work-apron,  with  double 

Pocket   ... 


6522 


Gardening-    Apron, 
Pockets... 


with     deep 


3071 


Patterns  for  Men  and  Boys. 

Man's  Dressing-  Gown  ...   5438 

Man's  Shirt  ...  ...  8073s 

Man's  Nightshirt        ...  8073A 

Man's  Pyjama  Suit     ...  ...   1921 

Boy's  Shirt  and  Knickers.  Sizes 

6,  8,  and  10  years  ...  3020 

Boy's  Nig-htshirt.  Sizes  8,  10, 

12,  and  14  years  ...  ...     807 

Boy's  Pyjama  Suit.  Sizes  8,  10, 

12,  and  14  years  ...  ...   1441 

Boy's  Knickers  and  Blouse-  Sizes 

4,  6,  and  8  years...  ...  2068 

Patterns  for  Girls. 

Pinafore  Frock  with  Guimpe. 

Sizes  12  and  14  years  ...  2876 
Girl's  Smock  with  pleated  Skirt. 

Sizes  10  and  12  years  ...  2874 
Magyar  Nig-htg-own.  Sizes  12,  14, 

and  16  years         ...  ...   1688 

Dressing  Gown,  with  Sailor  Collar. 

Sizes  8,  10,  and  12  years  ...  2090 
Princess  Petticoat.  Sizes  12,  14, 

and  16  years         ...  ...  1689 

Combination  Camisole  and  Petti- 

coat.    Sizes  12,  14,  and    16 

years      ...  ...  ...  1947 


PAPER   PATTERNS 

Price  4dl.   each,   exclusive   of  postage. 

The  following  Paper  Patterns,  which  are  of  special  French  cut,  and  perfect 

fitting,  can  always  be  obtained  by  writing  to  the  Fashion  Editor,  THE  GIRL'S 

OWN  PAPER  AND  WOMAN'S  MAGAZINE,  4  Bouverie  Street,  London,  E.C. 

When  ordering,  state  bust  or  waist  measure  and  number  of  pattern. 


Patterns  for  Girls — continued. 

Combination      Camisole      and  Number 
Knickers.     Sizes  12,  14  and 
16  years     ...  1217 

Bathing  Dress.     Sizes  10,  12,  14, 

and  16  years         ...  ...  2072 

Red  Riding  Hood   Cape.      Sizes 

10,  12,  and  14  years  ...  2015 

Girl's  Cookery  Apron,  with  Cap 
and  Sleeve  Protectors,  Silzes 
10,  12,  14  and  16  years  ...  5372 

Patterns  for  Children. 

Baby's  First  Outfit    ...  ...     381 

Baby's  One-Piece  Outfit  ...  5158 

Child's  Play  Bib,  with  Pocket. 

Sizes  2  and  4  years  ...1230 

Magyar  Short  Clothing  Set      ...  6500 
Baby's  Short  Clothing  Set        ...  2088 
Little    Girl's   Outfit   (including 
six  patterns).     Sizes  1   and 
2  years  ...  ...  ...     913 

Child's  Yoke  Frock.     Sizes  1,  2. 

4,  and  6  years      ...  ...   1470 

One-piece   Frock,    fastening    on 
shoulders.     Sizes  1,  2, 4,  and 

6  years 1813 

Child's   One-piece   Frock,  with 
long  Sleeves.     Sizes  2,  4,  6, 
and  8  years  ...  ...   1529 

Child's  Tucked  Yoke  Frock.  Sizes 

1,  2,  and  4  years  ...  ...  2285 

Boy's  Box-pleated  Tunic,  with 
Bloomers.     Sizes  1,  2,  and  4 
years      ...  ...  ...  2286 

Child's  Sailor  Romper  Suit.  Sizes 

1,  2,  and  4  years  ...  3081 
One-piece  Rompers.     Sizes   1,  2, 

and  4  years  ...  -     1999 

Rompers,  with  Yoke  and  long 
Sleeves,  also  Hat.  Sizes  1, 

2,  and  4  years      ...  ...  2309 

Child's     Play     Suit,     including 

Frock,   Bloomers   and  Hat. 
Sizes  2,  4,  and  6  years        ...  2308 

Child's  Play  Overall,  with 
Bloomers.  Sizes  2,  4,  6,  and 
8  years  ...  ...  ...  3011 

Peasant  Dress  fastening  at  side- 
front.  Sizes  4, 6,  8,  &  10  years  2065 

Tucked  Long- waisted  Dress,  with 
round  Collar.  Sizes  2,  4,  6, 
and  8  years  ...  ...  1883 

Pinafore  Dress,  fastened  on  shoul- 
ders with  guimpe.  Sizes  4, 
6,  8,  and  10  years  ...  1276 

Empire  Dress,  with  square  neck. 

Sizes  6,  8,  10,  and  12  years     5664 


Numbet 

Coat,  with  Round  Collar.     Sizes 

4,  6,  8,  and  10  years  ...  3023 

Red   Riding   Hood  Cape.     Sizes 

4,  6,  8,  10,  12,  and  14  years     2015 
Guimpe.     Sizes  1,  2,  4,  6,  8,  and 

10  years...  ...  ...  1814 

Tucked  Nightgown.     Sizes  6,  8, 

10,  and  12  years  ...  ...  1687 

Nightgown   with   Square  Yoke. 

Sizes  1,  2,  4,  and  6  years  ...  5654 
One-piece   Combinations.     Sizes 

1,  2, and  4  years...  ...  2204 

Child's   Combinations.     Sizes  2, 

4,  6,  8,  10,  and  12  years     ...  4045 
Sleeping  Suit.     Sizes  1,  2,  4,  and 

6  years 3002 

Child's  Pyjama  Suit.     Sizes   2, 

4  and  6  years       ...  •••  4573 

Long-waisted     Petticoat,     with 
circular   Flounce.     Sizes   2, 
4,  6,  and  8  years  ...  ...  4704 

Princess  Petticoat,  with  Sleeves. 

Sizes  4,  6,  8,  and  10  years...  3019 
Two-piece    Princess    Petticoat. 
Sizes  2,  4,  6,  8,  10,  and  12 

years      ...  4046 

Under-bodice      and       Knickers 

Sizes  2,  4,  6.  and  8  years      ...   1685 
Petticoat,  with  Bodice.     Sizes  2, 

4.  6  and  8  years      1472 

One-piece  Pinafore.     Sizes  4,  6, 

and  8  years 2093 

Two-piece  Pinafore,  fastening  on 
shoulders,     Sizes   2,    4,  and 

6  years  2094 

School  Pinafore,  with  or  without 
Sleeves.      Sizes  4,  6,  and   8 
years      ...  ...  •»  1*73 

Pinafore,  with  Kimono  Sleeves. 

Sizes  4 ,  0,  and  8  years        ...  1578 
Pinafore,    with     Square    Yoke. 

Sizes  2,  4,  6,  and  8  years  ...  2092 

Baby  Doll's  One-piece  Outfit    ...  4056 

.  Girl  Doll's  Complete  Outfit    ...  2085 

Doll's  Underwear  Set  ...  5688 

Boy  Doll's  Outfit         ...  ...3001 

Baby  Doll's  Outfit       ...  •••  3000 

Girl  Doll's  Clothes,  with  Magyar 

Sleeves  ...  ...  •«•  3032 

Boy  Doll's  Clothes,  with  Magyar 

Sleeves 3033 

Bride  Doll's  Outfit      ...  ...  5360 

Girl  Doll's  One-piece  Outfit      ...  5687 


The 

Home  Art 

Crochet 

Book 


CONTAINING 

ENTIRELY  NEW  DESIGNS 

FORllNGERlE.EDGINGS  £ 

INS  t  llTIONS.B(Wf>E!c.S  FOR 

TH  AY  CLOT  MS  &  D  OILEYS 
DEEP  LACES  PORTABLE 
CLOTHS  &  VALANCES 
MOTIFS  FOR  INLET  WORK 
£  IRISH  LACE 


THE 


HOME  ART  SERIES 

By     FLORA     KLICKMANN, 

' 


CROCHET 


Containing  Entirely  New  Designs  for  Lingerie, 
hdgmgs  and  Insertions,  Borders  for  Tray  Cloths 
and  D  oileys.  Deep  Laces  for  Table  Cloths  and 
Valances,  Motifs  for  Inlet  Work  and  Irish  Lace 


122  Pages. 
Demy  8vo,   I/-  net. 


149  Designs. 

(By  Inland  Post,   1/5). 


"Will  prove  of  great  value  to 
the  art."— The  Standard. 


It  is  a  book  which  will  be  of  the  greatest  interest 
to  needlewomen  Many  of  the  designs  are  extremely 
handsome,  the  advanced  worker  being  as  well  catered 
for  as  those  who  are  not  so  skilful."-7%e  Lady 

It  is  an  excellent  volume."—  The  Daily  Telegraph. 
those  interested  in 


THE  HOME  ART  BOOK  OF 
FANCY  STITCHERY 


With  New  Ideas  for  applying  Crochet  to  Lingerie  & 
Napery,  Bead-work  and  Fancy  Stitches  for  Dress 
Trimmings,  Feather-Stitching,  Smocking,  Hardanger 
Work,  Darned  Filet  Crochet,  Knitting,  Macrame 
Work,  Darned  Net,  Cross-Stitch,  Irish  Crochet, 

Embroidery   on    Flannel. 
120  Pages.          263  Designs. 

I/-   net  (by  Inland   Post,    1/5) 

"  It  is  thoroughly  practical,  and  will  be  welcomed  by  all 
women  who  delight  in  the  craft  of  the  needle."  —  The  Lady. 
"  A  practical  little  book."—  The  Birmingham  Post. 
"A  most  useful  shilling  manual   of  fancy   work.     An 

extremely    valuable 


THE  MODERN 

(SoCHEfBoOK 


addition  to  the 
needle-  woman's 
equipment." 

— TJie  Queen. 

A  wonderful 

shillingsworth." 

— The  Westminster 

Gazette. 


Home  Art 
Book  of 

Fancy 
Stitchery 

WTH  NEW  IDEAS  FOR 
APPLYING  CROCHET  TO 
LINGERIE  AND  NAPERV 
BEAD-WORK  AND  FANCY 
STITCHES  FOR  DRESS 
TRIMMINGS.  PK.VTHEP 
STITCHING.  SMOCKING 
HARDANGBR  WORK 
DARNED  Fi  LET  CROCHEI 

KNITTING.MACJMMK  WORK 

DARNBD  NET.  CROSS 
snicH.lRisH  CROCHET 

EMBROIDERY  on  FLANNEI 


Edited  by 

Flora  Klickmann 


FLORA  KLICKMANN 


THE    MODERN 
CROCHET    BOOK 

Containing  Original  Ideas  for  combining  Crochet 
with  Embroidery  and  with  Fancy  Braids,  together 
with  new  and  unusual  Designs  for  use  on  Household 
Linen,  on  Underwear,  and  as  Dress  Trimmings. 

120  Pages.         127   Designs. 

I/-   net  (by  inland  post   1/5). 
"This  is  a  model  of  what  such  books  should  be." 

— The  Standard. 

"Beautiful  illustrations  are  used,  and  these  include 
some  filet  mesh  motifs  which  are  bold  designs  for  the 
work  which  is  now  so  popular." — The  Guardian. 

"  It  is  thoroughly  practical  and  full  of  original  and 
dainty  ideas."—  The  Christian  World. 


PUBLISHED  AT  4,  BOUVERIE  STREET,  LONDON,  E.C. 

Either   of  the  above  Books  will  be  sent,  by  the  Publishers,  anywhere  in  the 
United    Kingdom,  post  free,  on  receipt  of  postal  order  (not  stamps)  for    1/5. 


355384 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


ococ 

i  M  The  Kir 


By  kind  frermitsio;    V"